Patent Publication Number: US-2012036049-A1

Title: System and method for software integration and factory deployment

Description:
RELATED APPLICATION 
     This application claims priority from U.S. provisional application 60/722,130, filed Sep. 29, 2005, incorporated herein by reference. 
    
    
     I. Field of the Invention 
     The present invention relates generally to systems and methods for software integration and factory deployment of the software. 
     II. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 
     Producing consumer electronics and in particular computers that might incorporate, in addition to operating systems with various configurations and suites of applications, several subsystems, each in turn with their own software drivers, can be complicated. Not only must a bill of materials (BOM) be defined, managed, and conformed to, but product defects and corrective actions must also be managed in way that ensures corrective action can be known and taken across the globe. 
     Because of the complexity inherent in the above considerations, it can happen that more than a single management system might develop over time, complicating efforts to integrate knowledge and data. As recognized herein, it is desirable to have a management system that can integrate the knowledge and input of designers, engineers, software integrators, etc. in ways that reduce engineering lead times and provide ease of tracking defects and cures to the defects in a single, globally shared system within an enterprise, while providing an easy way to manage regional differentiation of software offerings, sharing information between business groups within the enterprise, and eliminating duplicative data maintenance. 
     For example, many computers are sold on a configure to order/build to order (CTO/BTO) basis. Each software part can have a multidimensional relationship with each stock keeping unit (SKU) that represents a product when region, language, various operating system versions, and platforms are factored in. Thus, each software part can potentially have dozens of version releases to accommodate all of these variables. As but one example of the complexity of providing CTO/BTO computers, one version of a “click to DVD” software may be used only on French Windows MCE SR series SKUs that are sold only in Quebec, but another version may be designed to work on any model using Windows XP Home Edition Spanish Version regardless of region. 
     As another example of complexity, consider that there are currently about ten Sony VAIO platforms worldwide, and each platform may contain multiple VAIO models with variations on CPU, RAM, HDD capacity, wireless (WLAN, WWAN, and Bluetooth), graphics chipset, etc. Several major regions that include an even greater number of languages in many different countries, along with plural operating system variations, may require support. Still further, each model of VAIO for each region/language/country/OS variation contains well over one hundred pieces of software, each of which may be a unique version for only that model, or may be used for multiple models of VAIO, giving an idea of the exponential scope of the relationship between software and computer models the database must be designed to support. In summary, the relationships between software parts and the platforms they are used on have become extremely complex, and with this critical recognition in mind, the invention herein is provided. 
     In addition, the present invention critically recognizes that the quality of the final product is important. As understood herein, each piece of software may contain defects, or when combined in an image with other software may cause defects to be generated. 
     SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION 
     As set forth further below, processes and tools are provided herein for quickly assessing the quality of a project by relating the defects to part releases, which are in turn related to projects. For example, if a major flaw is found in a particular release version of a part, this defect is related to the appropriate part release or releases so that the defect is instantly related to all the projects that use the particular part release. Given the complexity of the software BOMs, without the present invention this task would be difficult and time consuming to do manually. 
     Thus, preferred implementations of the present invention correlate the relationships between software parts, the platforms they are used on, and the quality of those parts. 
     A method is disclosed for managing computer production in an enterprise. The method includes receiving a block of software offerings, with each block being associated with at least one product series. A product series component structure is received that defines parts for a respective product series. Parts that are required for a product series are added to the block associated with the series, with parts being assigned to each software class and related software specification pair in a block based on the part or parts required for the pair to thereby define a design structure. The method includes establishing a software bill of materials (BOM) based on the design structure using a template and/or a snapshot. 
     In non-limiting implementations the method includes defining software offerings. A software offering includes at least one software class and at least one associated software specification. Software offerings are associated with respective product series to establish a configuration, with configurations cumulatively defining a configuration range that contains product offerings of the enterprise for all regions in which the enterprise does business. The method may include grouping classes into blocks. A block is associated with at least one product series. 
     The non limiting method may also include defining which classes are dependent on each other, and defining which blocks are base blocks. Defects can be associated with related classes and corrective actions associated with respective defects. 
     If desired, the method can includes associating a respective installation file with each software offering. Each installation file may include a data file format version number, a version number of an installation data snapshot, an installation order for modules, data required for confirming successful installation, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) data for each binary file, path information thr locating files in a file store, partition size information for recovery and customer partitions. Also, installation anal recovery tools may use a list of software releases directly instead of microcode, which is used only for customer recovery, with microcode bit mappings being constrained to respective recovery media sets. 
     In another aspect, a software management database on a computer readable medium can contain data structures supporting computer software provisioning for a range of CTO/BTO variations, language variations, region variations, and operating system variations. 
     Non-limiting data structures may include bill of materials (BOM) entities containing information related to parent BOMs and child BOMs, if any. Each BOM entity can also include an engineering part ID, a software release ID, a major version ID, a group ID, a component ID, a planning parts ID, and a software series ID. A plan parts entity can also be provided that includes launch dates for software base releases, import dates for software bases indicating when the bases were imported into computers, and identifications for software bases. 
     Other non-limiting entities in the database may include component entities including launch dates for software base releases, import dates for software bases, identifications for software bases. Software release entities containing a base ID, a name, a file path, a launch date can also be provided, as can be software release status entities that include data representing status and name of a software release. Additional database entities may include: a group entity containing data representing a name and launch of a type, a series entity containing a software series ID, base ID, name, an indication of being active, a launch date, an import date, an engineering parts entity containing an engineering part ID, a base ID, a type ID, a name, a launch date, and indication of dependent parts, an engineering parts major revision entity containing information related to default use, an engineering part software release entity containing information on a related engineering part entity, a related engineering parts major revision entity, a related language code entity, and a language entity containing information related to a language name and a language code. 
     In another aspect, a computer-implemented system for creating bills of materials (BOMs) includes logic that can be executed by a computer and stored on a computer readable medium. The logic facilitates creation of BOMs using templates and/or snapshots. BOMs can be automatically generated based on part attributes and groups of parts, major versions, and releases. The logic can automatically check BOMs to reduce errors. 
     In still another aspect, a computer system executing logic stored on a computer readable medium enters, into a first database, first software data. The first software data includes operating systems and configure to order build to order (CTO/BTO) options. The system transfers at least some of the first software data in the first database to a comprehensive global database, referred to herein colloquially as “ePic.” Second software data such as operating system updates, device drivers, and utilities is automatically adding to a bill of materials (BOM) through the comprehensive global database. Also, software along with metadata that describes the software can be checked into the comprehensive global database by users, and the BOM for a specific series/language/region can be frozen/locked and the process to create factory deliverables including software image, software modules, and data can then begin. 
     The database tracks defects and relates them to parts, stores test cases which are related to parts which in turn allows test strategies to be auto-generated. 
     The details of the present invention, both as to its structure and operation, can best be understood in reference to the accompanying drawings, in which like reference numerals refer to like parts, and in which: 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
         FIGS. 1-3  are diagrams of non-limiting software management phases; 
         FIG. 4  is a flow diagram of non-limiting overall software development, integration, and factory deployment processes; 
         FIG. 5  is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software planning process; 
         FIG. 6  is a flow diagram of a non-limiting bill of materials (BOM) creation process; 
         FIG. 7  is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software development process; 
         FIG. 8  is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software integration process; 
         FIG. 9  is a flow diagram of a non-limiting factory deployment process; 
         FIG. 10  is a flow diagram of aspects of a non-limiting factory deployment process; 
         FIG. 11  is a flow diagram of a non-limiting software installation process; 
         FIGS. 12-17  are non-limiting screen shots used for defect management and test case management purposes; 
         FIG. 18  is a diagram showing software inputs to the epic database interface; 
         FIG. 18A  is a flow chart of logic of downloading an image to a test system; 
         FIG. 19  is a flow chart showing how BOM snapshots are generated, automatically at least in part, and entered into epic; 
         FIGS. 20 and 21  are consolidated diagrams showing the interaction between various entities in a non-limiting implementation; 
         FIG. 22  is a diagram showing various data entities in the ePic database and some of their attributes; 
         FIG. 23  is a map showing a non-limiting deployment regime; 
         FIG. 23A  is a flow chart showing software integration logic; 
         FIG. 24  is a flow diagram showing a non-limiting factory deployment process; and 
         FIGS. 25-27  are further non-limiting defect-related screen shots. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT 
     In the present non-limiting implementation, only part of the software data is contained in a data store referred to below as “DB Hero”. Specifically, software data that is visible to customers (e.g., operating systems, configure to order/build to order (CTO/BTO) options, software highlighted on web sites, etc.) is entered into DB Hero. As set forth in the specification below, periodically, some of the data from DB Hero is pushed to a comprehensive global database referred to herein as ePic, including both stock keeping unit (SKU) data and software data. 
     Software data that is not as visible to customers (such as operating system updates, device drivers, utilities, etc.) are added to the bill of materials (BOM) through the comprehensive global database. Software is checked into the comprehensive global database by developers, vendors or engineers, along with metadata that describes the software for process tools. The BOM for a specific series/language/region is frozen/locked and the process to create the factory deliverables (software image, software modules, and data) can then be started. As set forth in the detailed specification below, various process tools and manual process can be used to create the factory deliverables, all of which use data stored in the comprehensive global database. 
     Additionally, the factory deliverables are tested and validated to meet quality standards. The factory deliverables, and the metadata that describes them, are then delivered to the factory to be used in mass production. 
     To better understand terms used herein, the range of potential software offerings for a given sales cycle is defined as a set of classes and specifications. The class structure captures how the various software items will be offered to the customer, and is a specific type of software. Specifications, on the other hand, are individual software items that are associated with classes. Thus, a specification is an option that the customer may choose within a class, and a class may have more than one specification while a specification is assigned to only one class. Software offerings (classes and specifications) are associated with individual series, with the resulting structure being called the “configuration range,” The configuration range for a SKU is a list of all the Classes (and specifications) that are offered for that SKU. 
     By way of non-limiting example only, a “class” might be “pre-installed office software”, and specifications within that class from which the customer can select might be “MS Office professional”, “MS Office Small Business”, “MS Office Basic”, and “MS Works.” 
     With the detailed description below it will be appreciated that the database herein supports software variations in CTO/BTO, language, region, and OS. In addition, this database, and the tools that use it, allow for the creation of CTO systems, based on individual customer orders, in the mass production process with every piece of software preinstalled and ready to use, allowing for a virtually infinite number software offerings to customers as opposed to a few pre-defined options. 
     Also, unnecessary duplicate data entry is eliminated, hardware components are automatically mapped to software releases, and developers can specify language and geographic region supported for each software release at the time of software check-in, with the correct release being assigned to each BOM automatically. Further, BOMs are created using templates and snapshots for efficiency. Moreover, BOMs are automatically generated based on part attributes to reduce effort, and groups of parts, major versions, and releases can be defined and reused. Automatic checking of the BOMs is provided to reduce errors. In addition, installation and recovery tools use a list of software releases directly instead of microcode, which is used only for customer recovery, with microcode bit mappings being constrained to each recovery media set that is defined. This solves the problem of limited microcode bits and makes the changing of a recovery key easier. 
     Below are details of one non-limiting implementation of present principles,  FIG. 1  illustrates that the present methods may be undertaken by a computer system  10  including one or more enterprise computers  12 , each potentially having its own monitor  14  which can display the screen shots described below. The enterprise computers  12  can be used by developers and software engineers to execute the invention. Thus, the logic and the databases herein (including the so-called “DBHero” database  16  and global database  18 , referred to herein as “epic”) may be distributed over plural computers if desired, and some of the method steps may be undertaken by human users of the enterprise computers  12  while other method steps can be undertaken automatically by logic resident on computer readable media in computers. The computer readable media can include but is not limited to RAM, ROM, floppy disks, hard disk drives, optical disk drives, solid state memory devices, etc. 
     Referring briefly to  FIG. 19  out of turn, logic for creating BOMs is shown. Beginning at start state  20 , a software developer or integrator selects a software series, discussed above, from a list of series. The series can include data on software that an end user ordinarily “sees”, e.g., operating systems and configure to order/build to order (CTO/BTO) software options. 
     A human language and/or geographic region is selected at state  24  and then based on the selected language and region, at state  26  a processor in one or more of the enterprise computers  12  shown in  FIG. 1  can retrieve a list of component parts, including images and modules. These component parts typically include software the end user ordinarily does not “see” such as operating system updates, device drivers, and utilities. 
     The software integrator then selects the image or module to be built at state  28 , and at state  30  a BOM snapshot from a list is selected for the part selected at state  28 . In response, a processor in one or more of the enterprise computers  12  shown in  FIG. 1  then downloads, at state  32 , BOM items from a file store that may be resident in the global database  18  shown in  FIG. 1  to create an image to be loaded onto a computer to be vended. The image is checked in to the global database  18  at state  34  and uploaded to the file store, from whence it may be downloaded in the factory and loaded onto a computer to be vended. The process ends at state  36 . 
     A detailed description of a non-limiting implementation of the invention follows below. 
     0 Project Objectives 
     0.1 Goals 
     
         
         
           
             Enable a global software CTO process which can be used for all VAIO business styles (CTO, BTO, Retail). 
             Redesign the software process from design through manufacturing to be a global process. 
             Define a global modular software specification. 
             Define a global recovery specification. 
             Integrate the software and hardware design process. 
             Shorten lead-time to market. 
             Reduce engineering costs. 
             Shift engineering resources from maintenance roles to value-add development roles. 
             Maintain product quality in the new process. 
             Create a flexible process and system. 
             Automate tasks where appropriate to create greater accuracy and speed in activities. 
           
         
       
    
     0.2 Critical To Quality 
     
         
         
           
             World-wide scalability. 
             Global access to system (including third parties). 
             Data portability. 
             Multi-language handling for software items. 
             Seamless interfaces to DH Hero. 
             Turn-key factory deployment. 
           
         
       
    
     0.1 Dependencies and Assumptions 
     1.1 Dependencies 
     1.2 Assumptions 
     
         
         
           
             LangRegion Specifications (Specs) in DB Hero will be reused between series. 
             Software parts in DB Hero will be defined so that the “Part Name” and “Major Version” will be separate fields. 
             No language/region specific information will be entered for parts into DB Hero unless royalty/licensing requirements differ by language/region for the given software part. 
           
         
       
    
     User Roles and Responsibilities 
     
         
         
           
             Product Planner
           Determines the VAIO hardware and software offerings to be made to customers.   
         
             Program Manager
           Works with product planners, sales and marketing, and engineering to produce a detailed product plan and offering strategy for each VAIO product series.   
         
             Software Developer
           Develops software to be included in VAIO product offerings.   Prepares software so that it may be delivered to the factory for installation on products.   
         
             Software Integrator
           Uses OPK (OEM Pre-installation Kit) in combination with build systems to prepare images.   Prepares data used in the factory to convert manufacturing bills of materials (BOMs) to a list of software items for installation.   Prepares data used to facilitate the software recovery by the customer in the event of a failure with their VAIO product.   
         
             Project Test Lead
           Person in charge of preparing test cases and test strategies for a series and/or project (project would be Windows beta or VAIO mouse—this concept is not managed by ePic).   Assesses defects and devises test strategies to ensure they are fixed.   
         
             Test Lead
           Tester in charge of an individual software release/component   Maintain test cases as requirements change.   Resolves defects.   
         
             Tester
           Tests software deliverables to ensure quality product.   Identifies and tracks defects.   Reports quality status.   Sometimes maintains test cases as requirements change.   
         
             Factory Engineer
           Deploys the tools and software deliverables to the factory floor so that they may be automatically installed.   Collects data produced in the factory installation process and delivers it to a data warehouse.   
         
             Customer
           Makes hardware and software choices when placing an order for a custom product.   Initiates the recovery process in the event of a system failure.   The customer does not interact with the SIFD system directly.   
         
             3 Party Developer
           Checks current software releases.   
         
             3 rd  Party Factory Engineer/QA Tester
           Downloads or receives software deliverables and tools.   
         
           
         
       
    
     3 Business Process 
     3.1 Hardware Design 
     The Software Integration and Factory Deployment Project solution will operate within the context of the new design process specified as part of the DB Hero project.  FIGS. 1 through 3  represent a non-limiting version of DB Hero process. 
       FIGS. 1-3  do not include software related tasks. One objective of the proposed invention is to integrate the software and hardware design processes. 
     3.2 Overall Software Process—Now Referencing the Non-Limiting Process Outlined in FIG. 4. 
     1. Software Planning and Design
         a. Description
           i. Program Managers and Product Planners define software offerings.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Previous cycle&#39;s software offerings.   ii. New software offerings.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Configuration (Config) Range and Component Structure.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Offering structure and planning parts are entered in DB Hero.   ii. Planning Parts and Component Structure are transferred to ePic.   
               

     2. Software Development
         a. Description
           i. Register engineering parts and develop software.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Software offerings.   ii. Planning parts from DB Hero.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Software applications, drivers, documentation, and other software items.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Part registration and item check-in in ePic.   
               

     3. Software Integration
         a. Description
           i. Define image BOMs, build images, define media sets (factory and recovery), and prepare factory deliverables.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Software items checked-in by developers.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Images, Modules, and Series Software BOM.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Register parts.   ii. Check image releases.   iii. Create series software BOM.   iv. Define recovery media.   
               

     4. Release to Manufacturing
         a. Description
           i. Planner or Program Manager issues a RIM for a series/region.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Series software BOM   
           c. Outputs
           i. Installation data file. RTM&#39;ed image and module releases.   ii. RTM Notification.   
           d. System interactions
           i. RIM is issued in ePic.   ii. Installation data file is auto-generated in ePic.   
               

     5. Download installation data, images, and modules to factory
         a. Description
           i. Factory engineer downloads required files from ePic or receives them by disk,   ii. Factory engineer deploys the files to manufacturing servers.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Notification email of updated installation data.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Factory has up to date BOM information and all required images and modules,   
           d. System interactions
           i. Factory engineer downloads or receives latest version of installation data file.   ii. If the factory receives files by network, the factory file store system automatically downloads required images and modules and removes obsolete files.   iii. If the factory receives files by disk, the factory engineers load the files manually into the local factory file store.   
               

     3.3 Planning 
     The process outlined in the non-limiting diagram of  FIG. 5  may be carried oat in the DB Hero system. This process describes how the software and hardware design processes are integrated in DB Hero. 
     The process definitions are tailored to capture details relevant to SIFD only. Details of the hardware design process are not captured here. 
     This process describes how the software and hardware design processes are integrated in DB Hero. 
     1. Define Series
         a. Description
           i. Hardware planners define the series code names and numbers for a given sales cycle.   
           b. Inputs
           i. The list of new product series to be offered for a given sales cycle.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Series prototype numbers.   ii. Series code-names.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Series information is entered into DB Hero.   
               

     2. Identify Software Offerings
         a. Description
           i. The planner or program manager defines the software strategy for a given sales cycle. This strategy does not yet specify which software offerings will be made at a series level.   ii. Sony and 3 rd  party software offerings that may be carried over from a previous cycle are identified.   iii. New Sony and 3 rd  party software offerings are identified.   iv. Updates to existing specifications are made if required.   v. New specifications are added to classes if required.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Previous cycle 3 rd  party vendor software items.   ii. Previous cycle Sony software items.   
           c. Outputs
           i. The tentative list of 3 rd  party and Sony software offerings for the given sales cycle.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. None.   
               

     3. Define Classes and Specifications
         a. Description
           i. A “Class Definition Committee Meeting” is held multiple per year. The purpose of each meeting will be to define the software classes and their contents (specifications) to be used two sales cycles later. Hardware classes are defined separately.   ii. The range of potential software offerings is defined for the given sales cycles as a set of classes and specifications. Offerings for individual product series will not be defined at this point.   iii. The classes and specifications defined are global and commonly used across all regions. The class structure captures how the various software items will be offered to the customer.   iv. Specifications for individual software items, if known, are identified and associated with classes.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Previously defined classes and specifications.   ii. New class definition ideas.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Class Names.   ii. Specification Names (e.g. class contents).   iii. Class/Specification relationships.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. A DB Hero administrator enters the classes into DB Hero. Users cannot input classes due to limitations of DB Hero Software.   ii. A Product Planner or Program Manager enters specification information and elms/specification relationships into DB Hero.   
               

     4. Define Planning Level Parts (e.g. royalties, catalogue, etc.)
         a. Description
           i. Software offerings are broken down into individual parts. Offerings which have varying royalty, licensing, or catalogue requirements must be broken up into discrete items.   ii. These parts will be associated with classes and specifications during the block definition process at a later time.   iii. These parts will later be used in ePic to help create SW BUMS,   
           b. Inputs
           i. Software offerings.   ii. Royalty, licensing; and catalogue requirements.   
           c. Outputs
           i. List of software parts.   
           d. System interactions
           i. The parts identified are registered in DB Hero.   
               

     5. Define Offerings Structure and Constraints
         a. Description
           i. Software offerings (classes and specifications) are associated with individual series. The resulting structure is called the Config Range. The Config Range is global in scope and contains all product offerings, both hardware (HW) and software (SW), for all regions.   ii. Constraints on the offering range are identified as necessary for engineering or business reasons. These constraints are also global in scope; they do not reflect regional constraints. Regional constraints will be implemented in regional CTO sales systems or implicitly included in fixed configurations defined from the Config Range.   
           b. Inputs
           i. The software offerings (classes and specifications) identified for the given sales cycle.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Offering strategy, structure, and constraints, series by series.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. The classes selected are associated with a series and are entered in DB Hero resulting in the Config Range,   ii. Constraints are defined in DB Hero as rules against the Config Range.   
               

     6. Define Block Structure
         a. Description
           i. Block structure definitions are used to generate the component structure. Users group classes into blocks and define which classes are dependent on each other and which blocks are “base blocks.”   
           b. Inputs
           i. Config Range for each series,   
           c. Outputs
           i. Block structure of the classes for a given series.   ii. Component Structure without parts.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. The blocks defined are entered in DB Hero.   ii. Classes are associated with the blocks per the defined block structure in DB Hero.   iii. “Dependency” and “Base Block” flags are set as required.   
               

     7. Confirm Component Structure
         a. Description
           i. Program Manager or Product Planners confirm components without parts whether these components are made in just proportion—without exaggeration or omission—for their region.   ii. Confirmation of components is done by each region.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Component Structure without parts.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Confirmation List.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. None.   
               

     Notes: 
     
         
         
           
             1, DB Hero series can be made “cycle-less” by adding an additional class specifying product cycle or software revision for integrators to manage software offerings from series to series.
 
3.4 Engineering Software BOM Creation—Now referencing the limiting process outlined in  FIG. 6 .
 
           
         
       
    
     1. Transfer Parts and Series info to ePic
         a. Description
           i. The parts and series defined DB Hero are transferred to ePic.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Series and Parts registered in DB Hero,   
           c. Outputs
           i. Series and Planning Parts registered in ePic.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Scheduled system process and/or user initiated process.   
               

     2. Planning BOM Creation
         a. Description
           i. Parts required for each block are added to the block structure for a series. The parts are assigned to each class/specification pair in a block based on which parts are required for that option. This structure is called the “Design Structure.”   ii. When the Design Structure is complete, DB-Hero generates the Component BOM, e.g. Component Structure, for the series.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Block Structure.   ii. Parts.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Component Structure with parts,   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Parts are associated with specs via a block/spec pivot table DB Hero.   
               

     3. Define engineering image and module parts as required
         a. Description
           i. Developer or integrator defines engineering parts in ePic as required. ePic engineering parts can include many things, including images, modules, recovery media sets, documentation, etc.   ii. Developer defines technical attributes of each part. (See ePic attributes below for more details.)   iii. Developer optionally specifies the target series for this part. One or more target series may be specified.   iv. Developer specifies the languages to be supported by this part.   v. Developer specifies dependencies between this part and other parts.   vi. Developer provides installation instructions, including installation order.   vii. Once these parts have been fully registered in ePic, associated software releases for the standalone parts can be checked-in.   viii. Composite parts, e.g. images, multipart modules, and recovery media, will require BOMs to be created before automated building can begin.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Information from hardware engineers, software engineers, and planners.   
           c. Outputs
           i. List of parts with their associated attributes and target series/language information.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Parts, attributes, and target series/language information is entered into ePic via user interface.   
               

     4. Associate planning level parts with engineering parts
         a. Description
           i. Developer/Integrator associates planning parts from DB Hero with one or more engineering parts defined in ePic.   ii. This activity is done for any planning parts that correspond to ePic engineering parts.   iii. These associations will be used later to generate the “Series Software BOM”.   
           b. Inputs
           i. DB Hero part list (planning parts).   ii. Engineering parts as defined in ePic.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Planning to engineering part associations.   
           d. System interactions
           i. The associations will be created via ePic user interface.   
               

     5. Define image &amp; module contents where required
         a. Description
           i. Developer/integrator creates individual image/module BOMs by defining relationships between parts. The Engineering Parts to be included in a given image or module are specified as the children of the top level part.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Parts completely defined in ePic.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Image/module BOMs,   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Developer/Integrator creates BOM structures in ePic using functions specific to each part type, e.g., “Image Planner”, “Media Planner”, “Module Planner.”   
               

     6. BOM Confirmation
         a. Description
           i. Program Managers or Product Planners confirm component structure.   ii. Confirmation of component structure is done by each region.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Component Structure, including parts.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Confirmation list or minutes of meeting,   
           d. System Interactions
           i. None.   
               

     7. Transfer Component BOM to ePic
         a. Description
           i. The component BOM for a given series is transferred to ePic.   
           b. Inputs
           i. DB Hero Component BOM.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Component BOM registered in ePic.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Scheduled system process and/or user initiated process.   
               

     8. Create Series Software BOM
         a. Description
           i. The “Series Software BOM” is a detailed BOM containing all the software releases assigned to a given product series and their relationship to DB Hero Component part numbers. It represents all the software releases (image, module deliverables) that could be installed on a unit and not the software BOM for a specific configuration.   ii. This BOM is initially generated automatically based on the target information of engineering parts, engineering part associations with planning parts, and the DB Hero Component DOM. The user can then make changes before the BOM creation process is complete.   iii. This data will be combined with recovery and installation data to create an installation data file for the factory.   iv. After initial generation, this BOM may be manually modified in the system to manage exceptions/limitations of software releases that are not covered by basic assignment to series and languages or DB Hero constraints.   
           b. inputs
           i. Image/module target series information.   ii. Planning part/engineering part associations.   iii. DB Hero Component BUM.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Series Software BUM.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. User will create Series SW BUM using a wizard.   ii. Series Software BUM may be edited via ePic   
               

     3.5 Software Development—Now Referencing the Non-Limiting Process Outlined in FIG. 7. 
     1. Register DB Hero Part
         See section 7.3, step 4.       

     2. Transfer Parts to ePic
         See section 74, step 1.       

     3. Register Part (ePic)
         See section 7.4, step 3.       

     4. Associate Planning Parts with Engineering Parts
         See section 7.4, step 4.       

     5. Develop Software Module
         a. Description
           i. Software Developer codes software module,   
           b. inputs
           i. Part definition and technical attributes as specified in ePic.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Packaged software module with all required installation scripts.   
           d. System interactions
           i. None.   
               

     6. Check-In Software Module
         a. Description
           i. Developer checks-in a software build.   ii. Developer updates technical attributes as required. These attributes include installation details, supported languages, and other technical information about the release.   iii. Developer logs release notes.   
           b. inputs
           i. Packaged software module with all required installation scripts.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Module is stored in the ePic file store.   ii. Technical information and release notes stored in ePic.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. The module check-in procedure will be initiated via ePic user interface or client utility.   ii. Files will be uploaded to a local file store, should they be available. If the files represent a module or application, they will be replicated automatically to other file stores. If files represent an image, they will not be replicated to other file stores unless other system users request the replication.   
               

     3.6 Software Integration—Now Referencing the Non-Limiting Process Outlined In FIG. 8 
     ePic System Interlace can Engage Each Regional Build Tool Implementation. 
     1. Extract Build Info
         a. Description
           i. Integrator initiates build process. Build tools gets build data from ePic to be used as input to the build tools.   
           b. inputs
           i. ePic image ROM and technical attributes.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Build data fat matted generically.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Each regional build system will interface with ePic to obtain image BOMs and software parts.   
               

     2. Build Image
         a. Description
           i. Image is constructed using build tools.   
           b. inputs
           i. Build data extracted from ePic.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Image files and additional data to be stored in ePic.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. None.   
               

     3. Check-in Image
         a. Description
           i. Integrator checks-in image files to ePic.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Image files and additional data to be stored in ePic.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Image files are store in the ePic file store and relevant data is updated.   
           d. System. Interactions
           i. Information required for check-in will be entered manually into ePic via UI or supplied by the build system via an interface to ePic.   ii. Image files are uploaded to local file store as part of check-in function.
               3.7 Test Management and Defect Tracking   
               
               

     3.8 Factory Deployment 
     3.8.1 Online Factory Deployment Process—Now Referencing the Non-Limiting Process Outline in FIG. 9. 
     1. Release to Manufacturing
         a. Description
           i. Program Manager releases a series to manufacturing. This is done at for a Series/LangRegion combination.   ii. The system performs a number of sanity checks:
               1. Ensure that all SW releases are Golden Master or Release Candidates.   2. Ensure that releases exist in the system for the selected LangRegion.   
               
           b. Inputs
           i. Series SW BOM.   
           c. Outputs
           i. New snapshot of RTM&#39;ed Series SW BOM.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. PM issues RTM in ePic.   
               

     2. Generate Installation Data File
         a. Description
           i. The system updates the Installation Data File for the RTM&#39;ed releases.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Series Software BOM.   ii. Software release attributes.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Updated installation data file.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. None. This is an automated ePic process,   
               

     3. Notify Factory Engineers
         a. Description
           i. ePic notifies factories that installation data has been updated. Only factories that are affected should be notified.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Changed Installation data file.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Email notification message.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. None. Automated ePic process.   
               

     4. Download Installation Data File
         a. Description
           i. Factory Engineer downloads the installation data file from ePic,   
           b. Inputs
           i. Notification email.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Latest installation data file.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Initiate update of installation data file for the Series/LangRegion via file store function,   
               

     5. Download Image and Module Files.
         a. Description
           i. The factory file store is updated with the latest image and module files.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Installation data file.   
           c. Outputs
           i. New required images and modules are downloaded to local file store.   ii. Obsolete images and modules are deleted from local file store.   
           d. System interactions
           i. Initiate update of image/module releases for the Series/LangRegion via file store function.   
               

     6. Place order (NOTE: This step does not involve interaction with ePic. It is depicted here to show the order process relative to factory deployment for a CTO sales process).
         a. Description
           i. Customer places an order on a sales system.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Customer CTO choices or Fixed SKU selection.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Configuration as a list of DE Hero components.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Customer places order in sales system.   ii. Sales system or order management system passes order on to factory shop floor control system,   iii. Factory shop floor system delivers list of components to installation tools.   
               

     7. Install Software
         a. Description
           i. The installation data file and list of components in a file for the configuration are provided as inputs to the installation tools.   ii. The installation tools automatically install required software. Sec section 7.9 for further details.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Configuration of DB Hero component part list.   ii. Installation data file from ePic.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Log data file.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Installation tools are executed via automated factory process.   ii. Log file must be collected to a central location (should be implemented in factory process).   
               

     8. Deliver Log data to GARATA
         a. Description
           i. Log data file generated during the installation process is delivered to GARATA for loading into the database.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Log file from installation process.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Log file stored in GARATA or other data warehouse system.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Log file should be delivered to appropriate Sony server by FTP or other means.   ii. Files should be loaded into a database.   
               

     3.8.2 Offline Factory Deployment Process is Shown in FIG. 10. 
     3.8.3 Running Change Process 
     This section describes how running changes would be issued using ePic. This is the VOA EPC process adapted to ePic functionality. 
     3.8.3.1.1 Purpose 
     To facilitate, review and implement any Engineering Processing Changes (EPC&#39;s) to projects after initial RTM has been issued. 
     3.8.3.1.2 Definitions 
     EPC-A: A running change in which existing software on the Series Software BOM RTM snapshot is patched in the manufacturing process. These are deployed as modules of type EPC. There are two types of EPC modules:
         Temporary—Applied during imaging and “thrown away”. Not in HDD recovery partition.   Permanent—Applied during imaging and “kept”. Copied to the HDD Recovery Partition.
 
EPC-M: A running change in which a foundation image or module is added/changed/deleted to/from the RTM snapshot of a Series SW BOM.
       

     3.8.3.1.3 Deliverables 
     
         
         
           
             EPC Notification—an automatic email triggered when a program manager re-issues an RTM. 
             EPC Executable—module checked-in to an ePic file store and distributed using online (network) or offline (media) delivery methods. 
             Updated Installation Data File (IDF). 
             Testing Result (Product Quality Group). 
             Testing Result, if applicable (Manufacturing Quality Group). 
             Date EPC was implemented (Manufacturing)—relevant data should be delivered to GARATA. 
           
         
       
    
     3.8.3.1.4 Participants 
     
         
         
           
             Program Management Representative 
             Software Integration Representative 
             Quality Group Representative 
             Sustaining Group Representative 
             Application Champion or other applicable group representative 
             Manufacturing Representative 
           
         
       
    
     3.8.3.1.5 Roles &amp; Responsibility 
     
         
         1. Program Manager—Initiates EPC request, facilitates the documentation, posting and announcement of EPC release. Issues RTM in ePic to release the IDF and images/modules. 
         2. Software Integration Representative—Creates executable, checks in executable to ePic, announces release. 
         3. Quality Group Representative—Tests and verifies EPC on applicable models. 
         4. Manufacturing Representative—Tests and verifies EEC on applicable models, if applicable. Implements EPC and provides date of when EEC was implemented. 
       
    
     3.8.3.1.6 Process 
     
         
         1. Program Manager will email a software integration representative for an EEC request.
       a. Email should appropriate documentation: issue(s), resolution, applicable models.   
     
         2. Software Integrator will create EPC module or replacement image module. This may also be performed by the developer.
       a. New release will be checked-ifs to ePic.   b. Appropriate changes will be made to the Series SW BOM template.   c. New snapshot of the Series SW BOM Template will be created and flagged as a release candidate (RC).   d. Quality group will be notified.   
     
         3. Quality member tests software module.
       a. Test strategies are updated.   b. Testing is performed and test results logged.   c. If testing fails Integrator is notified and steps from #2 repeated.   d. If testing is successful all interested parties are notified.   
     
         4. Program manager issues an RTM for each applicable Series/LangRegion in ePic.
       a. System sends running change notification to applicable persons.   
     
         5. Installation data file and new release(s) are delivered to factory.
       a. Online or offline factory deployment methods documented above are used to deploy EPC.   
     
         6. If applicable, factory quality group tests new deliverables.
       a. If testing fails, interested parties are notified and steps from #2 repeated.   b. If testing succeeds, interested parties are notified.   
     
         7. Factory Engineer deploys new deliverables are deployed in production environment.
       a. Data concerning which units have the EPC applied is collected (from installation tool log data) and delivered to persons responsible for loading data into GARATA.   
     
       
    
     3.9 Installation 
     The installation process and tools will be common for all QA, Factory, and Recovery applications and is in reference by the non-limiting process of  FIG. 11 . 
     1. Generate Software Release List
         a. Description
           i. The list of DB Hero component part numbers representing a configuration are converted into a list of software releases.   ii. This step can be skipped and process can begin from step 2 if a valid software release list has been generated by other means.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Configuration (DB Hero component part list).   ii. Installation data file from ePic.   
           c. Outputs
           i. List of software releases,   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Installation tools function,   
               

     2. Generate Recovery Key
         a. Description
           i. A list of software releases is used to generate a MCode.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Software release list.   ii. Installation data file,   
           c. Outputs
           i. Encrypted MCode.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Installation tools function.   
               

     3. Write Recovery Key to DMI
         a. Description
           i. The Encrypted MCode is written to DMI.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Encrypted MCode.   
           c. Outputs
           i. MCode stored in DMI.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. This is done using DMI writing tools.   
               

     4. Partition Hard Drive
         a. Description
           i. The hard drive is partitioned according to data in the installation data file.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Installation data file.   ii. Series and LangRegion.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Hard drive is partitioned appropriately.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Installation tools output a list of partitions with sizes.   ii. Partition tools are used to partition the hard drive as part of factory process.   
               

     5. Copy required file to recovery partition (HDD Recovery Only).
         a. Description
           i. If the series uses HDD Recovery partition, the recovery partition is prepared by the installation tools:
               1. The WinPE recovery partition is written to P1.   2. Images modules and required data are copied to the recovery partition.   3. Installation data file (or a portion of it) are copied to recovery partition.   
               
           b. Inputs
           i. Software release list.   ii. Installation data file.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Recovery partition is completely setup.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Installation tools function.   
               

     6. Prepare Customer Partition(s)
         a. Description
           i. If the series uses HDD recovery, then the customer partitions are prepared by initiating the user recovery process in “unattended mode.”   ii. If HDD recovery is not used, the installation tools prepare customer partitions directly.   
           b. Inputs
           i. installation Data File.   ii. Software Release list.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Customer partitions are prepared.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Installation tool function.   
               

     7. Generate Log Data
         a. Description
           i. Data about the releases installed are stored in a file suitable for loading into GARATA or any other data warehouse.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Data about installation activities.   ii. Information about the unit (S/N, service tag, MCode, etc).   
           c. Outputs
           i. File containing log information.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. Creation of the log file is an installation tools function.   ii. The log file must be collected and delivered to appropriate system as part of factory process.
 
Within this process flow, three use cases for installation tools will be supported:
   
           1. Installation using a list of DB Hero component part numbers.
           a. Convert list of component part numbers to list of software releases.   b. Generate MCode using list of software releases.   c. Install software.   
           2. Installation using a MCode.
           a. Generate list of software releases using MCode.   b. Install software.   
           3. Installation using a list of releases.
           a. Generate MCode (optional).   b. Install software.   
           Factory Installation will use method #1 only. For retail models the DB Hero component part number list can be prepared offline and distributed at RTM time.   Recovery Media Sets (RDVD&#39;s or Fulfillment Media) can use method #2.   HDD Recovery and recovery using customer created media can use method #3.   Test system preparation can use all three methods.       

     3.10 Recovery 
     3.10.1 Recovery Media Preparation 
     1. Define recovery media engineering parts.
         a. Description
           i. Engineering parts for fulfillment recovery media are defined in ePic as “Recovery Media Sets,” Engineering parts for user created recovery media are not defined.   ii. NOTE: ePic need not be aware of specific recovery media types (SRCD, ARCD, etc.). This can be managed by recovery media creation tools. ePic also need not support media layout functions: eventually only RDVD&#39;s with a single set of recovery tools and factor-v distribution media need be supported.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Series Software BOM snapshot.   ii. Additional Engineering parts required for recovery media,   iii. Media set specific information.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Recovery media BOM in ePic.   
           d. System Interactions
           i. User defines recovery media using “recovery media planner” in ePic.   
               

     2. Generate MCode Specification. 
     
         
         
           
             a. Description
           i. System calculates MCode Specification. An MCode Specification (or MCode Spec) is a set of bit/release relationships. More than one release can be assigned to one bit.   
         
             b. Inputs
           i. Series Software BOM.   ii. Component/Release Mappings.   
         
             c. Outputs
           i. MCode Specification.   
         
             d. System Interactions
           i. Automated process with possible manual intervention.   
         
           
         
       
    
     3. Create Recovery Media.
         a. Description
           i. Recovery Media (AKA, Fulfillment Media or RDVD&#39;s) are created using external tools.   ii. Tools use BOM&#39;s created in ePic.   iii. Optionally, media images can be checked into file store as a software release.   
           b. Inputs
           i. Recovery Media BOM and attributes as defined in ePic.   
           c. Outputs
           i. Physical Recovery Media.   ii. Optionally, media images.   
           d. System Interaction
           i. Media creation tools interface with ePic to retrieve Recovery Media BOM and part attributes.   ii. Media images optionally checked-in to ePic file store, interactions with other systems.
 
4 Interaction with Other Systems.
   
               

     4.1 Overview 
     ePic will interface with many systems and tools. This chapter summarizes those interfaces. 
     1. DB Hero
         a. DB Hero may be the global product data management system (PDM) for the VAIO business.   b. ePic can gather data from DB Hero to be used in BOM creation and factory deployment.   c. ePic can interface directly to DB Hero to retrieve needed data. No data need be fed back into ePic.       

     2. Image/Module Build Tools
         a. Tools used to build image (or module) releases and check them into the ePic file store.   b. ePic will export BOM data to these tools and provide functionality for checking in binary releases.   c. Data and functionality will be exposed to tools via an interface DLL.       

     3. Test System Preparation Tools
         a. Tools used to install software on systems to be used for testing.   b. ePic will expose BOM data for pre-integration testing and installation data files for post-integration testing.   c. Data and functionality will be exposed to tools via an interface DLL.       

     4. Media creation Tools/Systems
         a. Tools used to create recovery and factory media. Similar to image building tools.   b. ePic will export BOM data to these tools and provide functionality for checking in media image releases.   c. Data and functionality will be exposed to tools via an interface DLL.       

     5. VELSUN
         a. Global sustaining defect tracking system.   b. ePic will provide functionality for exporting defects to this system.       

     6. VALSUN
         a. Software development defect tracking system,   b. ePic will provide functionality for exporting defects to this system.       

     7. ESG
         a. VOE sustaining system.   b. ePic will export software parts and BOM data and defects to this system.       

     8. OASIS
         a. VOA tool to create MCode writing floppy disks.   b. Used by many Sony personnel to image systems with Recovery Media.   c. ePic will pass simple parameters to this system using an HTTP GET/POST request.       

     4.2 A Project Peripheral Components 
     Several components external to the core ePic system will be developed by Neusoft, VOA, and VBD to facilitate these system interactions. Detailed requirements for these components are captured throughout chapter 9.
         ePic Interface DLL
           Win32 library.   Detailed requirements in chapter 9.14.   
           Installation Tools
           Installation tools used in for testing, factory installation, and recovery media   Tools use the ePic installation data file, DB Hero component list, and/or software release list as inputs.   Tools output data suitable for import to GARATA.   
           Test System Preparation CD
           WinPE based CD may be used to install software releases managed by ePic on test systems to be developed by SIT.   Current US implementation, called MINDS (Modular Installation Network Download System), adapted to meet requirements. interacts with ePic using the ePic Interface DLL and utilize the Installation Tools.   
           MCode Encoder/Decoder DLL
           Mcode encoding/decoding libraries adapted to work with ePic Installation Data Files by SIT.   This library used by both ePic and Installation Tools for all MCode encoding/decoding requirements.
 
In addition to the above components, build systems interface with ePic and use ePic data (see chapter 12). Sirs build system (Magellan) will interface with ePic using the ePic Interface DLL. SDN will use the build system provided by VOA.
   
               

     5 Requirements 
     5.1 Key Terms 
     The following terms are important for understanding requirements in this section. Additional terms are defined in chapter 13.
     LangRegion: Term used to describe the combination of an ISO-639 language code with an ISO-3166-1 country code. (For example, “es_SP”, “es_MX”, “jp_JP”, “en_UK”, “en_US”, etc.), ePic and DB Hero will use LangRegion codes to define which language/region combo is to be supported by a software release.   Engineering Part: All software, documentation, and media sets are defined as “engineering parts” in ePic. Each engineering part can have many software releases associated with it.   Major Version: Attribute of an Engineering Part referring to the Major Version of a software item. Major Version is treated like an individual entity in ePic for certain functions.   Release: A release corresponds to a specific set of files and directories checked into ePic for a specific engineering part. Releases can satisfy one or more LangRegions.   Planning Part: ePic term for software parts defined in DB Hero.   Packaged Software: Software which has been packaged using WISE, Install Shield or some other installer technology (whether it was packaged by Sony or an ISV). Packaged Software is NOT the same as a module.   Foundation Image: Also known as “Base Image”. This is a set of files includes the OS and any software items (drivers, utilities, etc.) the integrator chooses to include. Recovery related components (PAC files, data files, etc.) are also considered a part of the Foundation Images.   Module: Software packaged with WISE which is suitable for use by factory installation tools (the installation is silent/unattended; the installation can be verified by install tools; the module is BIOS locked; etc.). ePic will support three types of modules: “Module”, “X-Module”, or “EPC.” “Modules” install in a single configuration, “X-Modules” are can install different configurations depending on target system characteristics. “EPC&#39;s” (Engineering Process Changes) are used for patches or running changes.   

     General 
     Requirements that apply to all aspects of the system are listed here. 
     5.1.1 Usabliity/Performance 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 GEN-2.1 
                 All system data should be 
                   
               
               
                   
                 stored and presented in 
               
               
                   
                 double-byte characters. 
               
               
                 GEN-2.2 
                 All user interface prompts, 
                 No inter- 
               
               
                   
                 command line tools, and 
                 nationalization 
               
               
                   
                 online documentation 
                 of UI&#39;s! 
               
               
                   
                 will be in English only. 
               
               
                 GEN-2.3 
                 System should perform 
               
               
                   
                 adequately for users in 
               
               
                   
                 remote regions so that 
               
               
                   
                 work schedules are not 
               
               
                   
                 impacted by network 
               
               
                   
                 speeds. 
               
               
                 GEN-2.3.1 
                 Page views via the 
               
               
                   
                 Sony intranet shall take no 
               
               
                   
                 more than 10 seconds per 
               
               
                   
                 view. 
               
               
                 GEN-2.3.2 
                 Uploads/downloads between 
               
               
                   
                 file stores on the Sony intranet 
               
               
                   
                 should occur at a minimum 
               
               
                   
                 rate of 450 MB per hour 
               
               
                   
                 (1 Mbps). 
               
               
                 GEN-2.4 
                 Online user documentation 
               
               
                   
                 should be available. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.1.2 Availability 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                 GEN-3.1 
                 The main system (ePic) must be available to all Sony 
                   
               
               
                   
                 users 24 hours a day via intranet. 
               
               
                 GEN-3.2 
                 Manufacturing deliverables should be available to 3 rd   
                 If network delivery is available, it is 
               
               
                   
                 parties. 
                 preferred, but an offline delivery method 
               
               
                   
                   
                 could also be used. 
               
               
                 GEN-3.2.1 
                 Only RTM&#39;ed or Test RTM&#39;ed items should me made 
               
               
                   
                 available to 3 rd  party factories. 
               
               
                 GEN-3.2.3 
                 Pre-release deliverables may be distributed to 3 rd   
               
               
                   
                 parties (for example, for validation purposes). Such 
               
               
                   
                 deliveries should be limited to only what is required to 
               
               
                   
                 ensure efficient use of resources. 
               
               
                 GEN-3.3 
                 Release check-in functionality should be available to 3 rd   
                 Per 2005-6-30 BRD feedback from 
               
               
                   
                 parties not on the Sony Network. 
                 VBD. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.1.3 Support 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 GEN-4.1 
                 Live support for the system 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 must be available to all 
               
               
                   
                   
                 users 24 hours a day. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.1.4 Security 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 GEN-1.1 
                 Authentication policy as specified by SGS, 
                 The SGS operated “Common 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Authentication” system will be used for 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 authentication for all users. 
                   
               
               
                 GEN-1.1.1 
                 System should be accessible only to named users. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 GEN-1.2 
                 Authorization policy. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 GEN-1.2.1 
                 System authorization will be role/resource based. See 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 table in 9.2.4.1 for role to resource mappings. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 GEN-1.2.2 
                 Authorization of the web-based application will be 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 performed at a screen level. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 GEN-1.2.3 
                 Users can be assigned to one or more roles. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 GEN-1.2.4 
                 3 rd  party users can only access data for series which 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 they have been explicitly authorized to view. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Requirements to be provided by SGS. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.1.4.1 Role to Resource Mapping 
     Each instance of an entity can also have an “owner list”. Users with permissions to create/edit and entity can add other users to the owner list. Users on the owner list can edit that instance of the entity regardless of their assigned system role(s). 
     
       
         
           
               
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Role 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 PM/ 
                   
                   
                   
                 Test 
                 Project 
                 Factory 
                 3 rd  Party 
                   
               
               
                 Resource/Function 
                 Planner 
                 Developer 
                 Integrator 
                 Tester 
                 Lead 
                 Test 
                 Engineer 
                 User* 
                 Admin 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.1: Manage series information. 
                 X 
                   
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 BOM-1.2: Manage planning parts. 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 INT-1.12: Create/edit SKU&#39;s. 
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 BOM-1.9: Create/edit sample SW BOMs 
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 (release lists). 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3/DEV-1.1: Manage engineering parts. 
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 BOM-1.4: Manage images. 
                   
                   
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 BOM-1.6: Create series SW BOM. 
                   
                   
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 BOM-1.7: Set dependencies. 
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 BOM-1.8: Create/edit groups. 
                   
                   
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 DEV-1.2: Check-in SW releases. 
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
                 X 
               
               
                 MFG-1.1/MFG-1.2: Issue RTM/Test RTM. 
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 Download installation data and binary data for 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
               
               
                 SW releases. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Download latest DB Hero data into ePic. 
                   
                   
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 Add users, set privileges. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Manage 3 rd  party access. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 Set champion of parts. 
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 Mass edit entities. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 Create/edit Test Case. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 Create/edit Test System. 
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 Create/edit Test Strategy. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 Edit Test Case Result. 
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 Create/Edit Defect (except for status and 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
               
               
                 resolution). 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Create/Edit Defect (set status and resolution, 
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 except for “fix-verified” resolution). 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Create/Edit Defect (all attributes). 
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
                 X 
                 X 
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 Defined MDA/Benchmark categories/keys for 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                 test cases. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Edit miscellaneous IDF Data 
                   
                   
                 X 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 X 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
         
         
           
             Third party users can only view data for Series they have been authorized to view (see section 9.13.1, requirement ADM-1.3, “Manage 3rd party data access.”). 
             For VBD/SDNA, software project leaders (SPL&#39;s) will be assigned both the “PM/Planner” and “Developer” roles. 
           
         
       
    
     5.1.5 Legacy Data 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 GEN-5.1 
                 For all groups who 
                 Data will be manually 
                   
               
               
                   
                 require any legacy data 
                 entered to assist in training 
                   
               
               
                   
                 to be loaded, legacy 
                 users and quality testing. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 data will be manually 
                 ePic schema is significantly 
                   
               
               
                   
                 entered and software 
                 different from any existing 
                   
               
               
                   
                 releases manually 
                 systems. Data import may 
                   
               
               
                   
                 checked-in. 
                 be impractical. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.2 Planning 
     These are requirements for the “high-level planning” functions implemented in DB Hero that impact STD. Only business rules or functional requirements which are necessary to ensure proper STD functionality are captured here. 
     5.2.1 Usage Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                   
                 Regional differentiation of software offerings 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 will be managed in ePic. 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 This is generically solved by implementing 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 DB Hero “spec to component relationship” 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 functionality (see section 9.6, INT-1.9). 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.2.2 Business Rules 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 PLAN-2.1 
                 A special DB Hero Class 
                 ePic must use this to 
                   
               
               
                   
                 (e.g., Product Cycle or SW 
                 revise software from 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Revision) must be introduced 
                 cycle-to-cycle. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 into a Series Config 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Range in order for the Series 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 to be “cycle-less.” 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.3 Engineering Software BOM Creation 
     Requirements for the “low-level planning” functions and software BOM creation in ePic are listed here.
 
The following is a graphical representation of an ePic Engineering Part to help readers understand requirements:
 
     5.3.1 Usage Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 BOM-1.1 
                 Manage series information. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.1.1 
                 A series can be designated as active or inactive to 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 indicate whether the series is EOL. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.1.2 
                 Product cycle (SP05, SU05, FA05) must not be 
                 Since many products can be in production for 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 required to organize data in the system. Product cycle 
                 many cycles, the active/inactive designation 
                   
               
               
                   
                 will be an attribute of a series. 
                 will be used in place of product cycle. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.1.3 
                 Set series attributes. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-1.2 
                 Manage planning parts. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-1.2.1 
                 Associate engineering parts with planning parts. 
                 This information will be used to generate a 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 Associations can be made to part name or a part name 
                 “Series Software BOM”. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 and major version. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3 
                 Manage engineering parts. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.1 
                 Create/edit engineering part. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.2 
                 Set part type. The following part types will be 
                 See ePic attributes in section 10.4. 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 supported by ePic: 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                  1. Foundation Image 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                  2. P1 (recovery) Image 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                  3. Monolithic Image 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                  4. OS Setup 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                  5. Application 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                  6. Driver 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                  7. Online Documents 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                  8. OS Add-on 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                  9. Module 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 10. Internal Tools 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 11. BIOS/Firmware 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 12. Recovery Media Set 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 13. Factory Media Set 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 14. Other 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.3 
                 Set part attributes. 
                 See ePic attributes in section 10.4. 
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.4 
                 Engineering parts can be composite parts, consisting of 
                 This applies to not just images, but modules 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 several other parts, or a single standalone part. 
                 and other part types as well. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.5 
                 Engineering parts can be associated with planning parts 
                 More fine grained associations are possible by 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 (so that series associations can be made via the DB 
                 editing the “Series Software BOM Template.” 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Hero Component BOM), or they can be manually 
                 LangRegion associations to releases will be 
                   
               
               
                   
                 associated with individual product series (for example, 
                 handled at module check-in time. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 manual association would be made for hardware 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 specific software items). 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.5.1 
                 User may also specify “all series” so that the part 
                 So if new series are added after this is set, they 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 would be used for all active series existing in the 
                 would still pick up this part in their BOMs. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 system at any moment in time. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.6 
                 The LangRegions to be supported by a part can be 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 specified at part creation time. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.7 
                 One or more software releases can be associated with 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 each part. Each software release can be associated 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 with one or more LangRegions. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.8 
                 For each LangRegion, one of the associated releases 
                 The default release can be manually 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 can be flagged as “default.” The default release will be 
                 overridden after Series Software BOM 
                   
               
               
                   
                 used for “Series Software BOM” creation. 
                 Template generation (see BOM-1.6.2). 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.9 
                 Electronic data files for printed documentation can be 
                 Per 2005-6-30 BRD feedback from VBD. 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 defined as engineering parts and stored in ePic. No 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 additional functionality specific to these items is 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 required. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.10 
                 Installation priority of the part can be specified relative 
                 Satisfies VBD QA WG requirements 1c. 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 to other part names/major versions as “BEFORE” or 
                 Installation tools will calculate installation 
                   
               
               
                   
                 “AFTER.” The system will not allow invalid 
                 order for a set of modules at installation time. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 installation order states (e.g., circular installation order 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 relationships) to be defined. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.11 
                 The Bios Lock ID (BLID) must uniquely identify a 
                 Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 foundation image. This means that relationship 
                 Requirement 1b. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 between BLID and FI will be one-to-one. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.3.12 
                 The user can specify whether parts are active or not. If 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 a user sets a part “inactive” then the system will 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ignore/hide the part in any BOM creation activities. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.4 
                 Manage images/modules. Images and modules are 
                 To be implemented as a “Part Registration” 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 engineering parts which can be final deliverables. 
                 wizard. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.4.1 
                 Set image/module type. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-1.4.2 
                 Create/edit image/module BOM Template. Each 
                 Composite parts only. 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 composite engineering part has exactly one BOM 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Template. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.4.2.1 
                 Groups, Part Names, Part Major Versions, and/or 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 Releases can be added to BOM templates. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.4.2.2 
                 Auto generate image/module BOM using target series 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 attribute of parts and groups. User can edit auto- 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 generated BOM before it is saved. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Perform Sanity checks: 
                 The first check is to alert users that items 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 Ensure items included in template must not be 
                 which are optional for a given series might be 
                   
               
               
                   
                 installed individually (use planning part 
                 included in the foundation image. The system 
                   
               
               
                   
                 associations). 
                 cannot know for sure from the DB Hero 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Ensure dependencies are satisfied. 
                 component structure, but it should indicate to 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 the user that an eng. part has planning part 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 associations. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.4.2.4 
                 Releases flagged as “disabled” cannot be added to a 
                 Per review with SDNA 2005-9-14 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 BOM template. 
                 (corresponding attribute REL-025 added). 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.4.3 
                 Snapshot BOM template (Freeze BOM). 
                 NOTE: This requirement applies to Series SW 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BOM Templates in addition to image/module 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 BOM Templates. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.4.3.1 
                 A snapshot contains only software releases 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 (unspecified releases on the template will be set to 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 defaults). Snapshots cannot be edited manually. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.4.3.2 
                 All part information at the time of snapshotting is 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 frozen in a snapshot. Changes made to the main data 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 after snapshotting will not be reflected in the snapshot. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.4.3.3 
                 BOM snapshots are exposed to build tools via the build 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 tool interface. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.4.3.4 
                 A BOM snapshot is retrievable as a file via ePic UI. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Dropped. Satisfied by ePic “group” concept 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 described in BOM-1.8.. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.6 
                 Create Series Software BOM. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-1.6.1 
                 System will generate a “Series Software BOM 
                 See requirement BOM-1.8 for definition of 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 Template”, which consists of the list of specific part 
                 “group”. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 names, major versions, groups and/or releases assigned 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 to a series, using DB Hero component structure, 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 planning part associations with engineering parts, and 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 the properties of engineering parts. The system will 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 show default value for unspecified items on the 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 template. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.6.2 
                 Edit “Series Software BOM Template”. Releases can 
                 This function allows special release 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 be edited manually. 
                 dependencies/incompatibilities to be handled. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.6.3 
                 The Series SW BOM will include mappings from one 
                 Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 1 g. 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 or more DB Hero components to one or more ePic 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 software releases. See section 9.6, requirement INT- 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 1.10. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.6.4 
                 Once the Series SW BOM Template is complete, the 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 user can snapshot the template. A snapshot contains 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 only software releases (unspecified releases on the 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 template will be set to defaults). Snapshots cannot be 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 edited manually. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.6.5 
                 All part information at the time of snapshotting is 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 frozen in a Series SW BOM snapshot. Changes made 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 to the main data after snapshotting will not be reflected 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 in the snapshot. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 The system will indicate problems to the user when 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 displaying the Series SW BOM template. Problems can 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 be: 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Non-RC/GM releases. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Target series information in conflict with 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 planning part association. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Dependencies not satisfied. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 No default releases available for a part. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 No releases available for a given language. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Dependencies are not satisfied. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.6.7 
                 The system should not allow an “inactive” part/release 
                 Added per review with SDNA 2005-9-14. 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 to be added to a series SW BOM template. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.7 
                 Dependencies between engineering part names and/or 
                 Satisfies VBD QA WG requirements 1a and 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 part name/major versions can be specified. 
                 1b. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.7.1 
                 Other parts can be selected and dependencies will be 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 specified as “DO NOT CARE”, “EXCLUDE”, or 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 “REQUIRED.” 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.7.2 
                 The system will not allow circular dependencies to be 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 defined. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Satisfies VBD QA WG requirements 1 g. 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Dropped per review session with VBD 2005- 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 9-15. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.8 
                 Create edit groups. Groups are user defined lists of 
                 This is an internal ePic concept intended to 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 engineering part names, major versions, releases, or 
                 allow users to define re-usable collections of 
                   
               
               
                   
                 other groups. 
                 parts. This concept, if used properly, makes 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 BOM creation more efficient. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.8.1 
                 Groups can be added to composite part BOM 
                 Note that groups are, for the most part, 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 templates. Changes made to group contents after group 
                 functionally equivalent to BOM templates. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 assignment to a BOM template will be reflected on the 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 BOM template. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.9 
                 Create edit test software BOM. A test software BOM 
                 Per VBD review 2005-9-15: A facility for 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 is a manually created list of software releases for a 
                 creating and sharing test software BOMs must 
                   
               
               
                   
                 single configuration. The releases must be listed in 
                 be available in the system. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 proper order of installation (based on installation 
                 This function will be used by both developers 
                   
               
               
                   
                 priorities specified in the system). 
                 and testers. It is the only way to create a 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 software BOM in the system before a series 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 software BOM has been prepared. 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 A test software BOM is, by definition, a 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 snapshot. BOM templating functions will not 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 be used for test BOMs. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.9.1 
                 User can search for and select part names, part major 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 versions, or releases to be added to a test BOM. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 System will select default release if user does not 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 specify a specific release. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.9.2 
                 System should provide filtering capabilities to the user 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 for selecting items for the test BOM. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.9.3 
                 System should examine dependencies of the items 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 selected and automatically add releases to satisfy these 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 dependencies. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-1.9.4 
                 User can download file containing the test BOM. 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                 BOM-1.9.5 
                 User can save the test BOM in the system, BOM can 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 be given a name for later retrieval. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.3.2 User Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 BOM-2.1 
                 Part Registration Wizard. 
                 Implements the Image and Module Planners. 
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-2.1.1 
                 Set general part attributes. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-2.1.2 
                 Set type specific part attributes. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-2.1.3 
                 Set part dependencies and installation order. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-2.1.4 
                 Associate with planning part/set target series. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-2.1.5 
                 If part is a composite part, show BOM Template 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 creation interface (optional). 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-2.1.6 
                 BOM snapshotting function (optional). 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-2.2 
                 Series Software BOM Builder (Wizard). 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-2.2.1 
                 System generates the series software BOM and shows 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 it to user with distinctive display of releases that fail 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 sanity checks or are marked as special. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-2.2.2 
                 User can edit Series SW BOM. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-2.2.3 
                 User can snapshot Series SW BOM. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-2.2.4 
                 User can create Component/Release mappings (see 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 INT-1.10). 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-2.3 
                 Entity Editor. Access to all attributes of an entity in 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 one place. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-2.3.1 
                 Screens must allow all attributes for each major system 
                 The same functionality as the wizard is 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 entity to be edited one screen. 
                 supplied for each entity type. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.3.3 Business Rules 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 BOM-3.1 
                 Business Rule for Engineering Part Creation 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-3.1.1 
                 A new part should only be created for a major version 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 release of software. Major version is defined as 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 specification change. Iterative releases within a major 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 release, to fix defects and such, are called Release 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Versions. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-3.1.2 
                 A part name should include the name of the part only, 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 in general terms. For example: Adobe Premiere 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Professional, VAIO Zone, Sonic Stage. The major 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 version number is an attribute of the part, and can be 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 concatenated for UI and reporting purposes. For 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 example, a part can be created with the Part Name of 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 “Adobe Premiere Professional” and the major version 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 number of “7.1”. The part becomes the concatenation 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 of the part name and major version number: “Adobe 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Premiere Professional 7.1”. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-3.1.3 
                 Part names should not contain specific references to a 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 series or CTO options. The following examples would 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 not be acceptable: “Adobe Premiere 7.1 for IRX-3560” 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 or “WinDVD 5.6 for Six Channel Speakers.” 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-3.1.4 
                 Part names can only contain the characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9,, 
                 Only pintable ASCII characters (including 
                   
               
               
                   
                 —, or. 
                 space) should be allowed in part names. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-3.1.5 
                 Major Version Number is a text field, with the same 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 character restrictions. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-3.2 
                 Changes to DB Hero controlled entities must be made 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 in DB Hero only and then propagated to ePic via 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 interface. Entity attributes owned by DB Hero must, 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 therefore, not be editable in ePic. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.3.4 Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 BOM-4.1 
                 Load series master from DB Hero. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-4.2 
                 Load parts master (planning parts) from DB Hero. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-4.2.1 
                 Certain classes of hardware parts (HDD&#39;s, CPU&#39;s, etc.) 
                 Hardware parts are required for Test/Defect 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 should not be filtered from the master parts list. If that 
                 management system functions. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 is not possible, all hardware parts should be loaded and 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ePic should filter hardware parts from UI. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-4.3 
                 Load component structure from DB Hero. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-4.4 
                 Load updates to all previously loaded DB Hero data. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 BOM-4.5 
                 DB Hero interface behavior rules: 
                 BOM-4.5.X applies to all DB Hero interface 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 requirements. 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-4.5.1 
                 DB Hero BOM data can be manually loaded from into 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 ePic (via ePic UI). Data updates should be performed 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 using the most efficient means available. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-4.5.2 
                 Pre DB Hero release BOM data can only be loaded into 
                 One button to update all DB Hero data for a 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 ePic manually. Initial load of any BOM must be 
                 series is ideal. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 manual. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-4.5.3 
                 After the DB Hero release, structure/part changes 
                 Without ECNs manual load is the only 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 which generate an ECN are automatically implemented 
                 possibility (except for series and parts, whose 
                   
               
               
                   
                 in ePic. Revision history is not kept. 
                 masters are synced regularly). 
                   
               
               
                 BOM-4.5.4 
                 ECNs can be requested by date range. ePic should 
                 Update period should be a configurable ePic 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 periodically request all ECNs since last update 
                 system option. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 automatically. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-4.5.5 
                 Email and UI notifications will be produced for 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 software integrators for the following changes to DB 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Hero BOMs: 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Any SW part (planning part) change on 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 component BOMs. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Any changes (HW or SW) to components 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 used in component/release mappings. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Changes to Config Range/Line-up. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 BOM-4.5.6 
                 DB Hero data will be loaded into ePic at most once per 
                 If users need up-to-date data, they can initiate 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 day, and at least once per week. 
                 a manual transfer via ePic UI. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.4 Software Development 
     ePic requirements to support developers who use the system are listed here.
 
The detailed format for software modules is documented separately in a “Modular Specification”.
 
     5.4.1 Usage Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 DEV-1.1 
                 Engineering part registration (developer specific 
                 See “Software Engineering BOM Creation” 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 requirements). 
                 for additional information concerning part 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 registration. 
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.1.1 
                 The set of LangRegions supported by the module must 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 be specified. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.1.2 
                 The part can be associated with a planning part and/or 
                 See BOM-1.3.5. 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 target series. Neither is required (though warning 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 should be issued if neither is selected). 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2 
                 Check-in software release (non-image). 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.1 
                 Developer must identify LangRegions supported by the 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 software release to be checked-in. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.2 
                 Developer must indicate installation method and 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 unattended installation command. Alternate 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 installation commands may also be entered with 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 comments. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.3 
                 Developer must indicate any special requirements of 
                 These releases will be given special attention 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 the software release (incompatibilities, special 
                 during “Series Software BOM” creation. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 instructions). System will flag release as having 
                 Can include a flag on release called “Special” 
                   
               
               
                   
                 special requirements where appropriate. 
                 or “Warning.” These releases would be called 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 out on part templates and snapshots and 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 comment would be displayed. 
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.4 
                 Developer must enter release notes. A release note is 
                 See attributes in section 10.4 for more details. 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 text entered into ePic. User can append an entry to the 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 release note. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.4.1 
                 Users can download all release note entries in a single 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 text file via the UI. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.5 
                 Software item check-in should allow files to be 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 checked-in to local mirror and uploaded to main store 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 asynchronously. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.6 
                 If the item to be checked in is not an image, it will 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 automatically be replicated to other file stores. If the 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 item is an image, replication will not occur 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 automatically. Users can request to the system that an 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 image be downloaded to their regional file store via 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ePic UI. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.7 
                 The following statuses can be specified for a release: 
                 Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 1d. 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 “ES/Test”, “FF”, “Pilot”, “CF”, “RC”, and “GM.” 
                 Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG requirement 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 2a. 
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.8 
                 User can optionally request that the system send the 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 release email. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.8.1 
                 Release email address list is a configurable system 
                 This list could also be auto-generated based on 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 item. 
                 roles. 
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.2.9 
                 User can set a release “inactive.” Inactive releases 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 cannot be set as “default” and vice versa. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.3 
                 Create/Edit Vendor 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 DEV-1.3.1 
                 User can store information about a software vendor 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 (Name, Address, Contact, Sony Contact). 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.3.2 
                 Vendor can be optionally associated with an 
                 It is appropriate to include vendor name in part 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 engineering part. 
                 name and also have a vendor association. 
                   
               
               
                 DEV-1.4 
                 User can initiate download of any release via ePic UI. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.4.2 User Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 DEV-2.1 
                 Extracting engineering part, release, 
                 Per 2005-6- 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 BOM data, and planning part 
                 30 BRD 
                   
               
               
                   
                 associations from the database 
                 feedback 
                   
               
               
                   
                 must be efficient for the developer. 
                 from VBD. 
                   
               
               
                 DEV-2.2 
                 Users should be able to easily initiate 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 download of any release via ePic UI. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.4.3 Business Rules 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 DEV-3.1 
                 Business rules specified as 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 part of requirement BOM- 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 3.1 apply to developers, as well. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.4.4 Interface Requirements 
     None 
     5.5 Software Integration 
     ePic requirements to support integrators who use the system are listed here. ePic will provide a single interface to build tools. Each regional group is expected to modify their build tools to work with the new interface.
 
Functionality specified here is to be used by integrators as part of image creation and Series Software BOM creation. Functionality to manage DB Hero SKU&#39;s and associated BOMs and create dummy SKUs and BOMs is also included here.
 
     5.5.1 Usage Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                   
                 Dropped. File store related requirements will 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 be captures in section 9.10. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.2 
                 Check-in software release (image). 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 INT-1.2.1 
                 Software item check-in should allow files to be 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 checked-in to local mirror and uploaded to main store 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 asynchronously. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.3 
                 Schedule software integration activities. 
                 Future Requirement. Not in scope. 
                 NTH 
               
               
                 INT-1.4 
                 Track software integration activities. 
                 Future Requirement. Not in scope. 
                 NTH 
               
               
                 INT-1.5 
                 Event triggered notification concerning software 
                 Future Requirement. Not in scope. 
                 NTH 
               
               
                   
                 integration activities. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.6 
                 System should not have any functional dependencies 
                 Build systems will be loosely coupled with 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 on any external build systems. 
                 ePic. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.7 
                 Monolithic Images will be created by selecting a SKU 
                 User must select which series SW BOM 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 that has been loaded from DB Hero or manually 
                 snapshot to use for this function. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 created in the system (see INT-1.12). The system will 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 automatically create the Image BOM using the series 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 software BOM. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.7.1 
                 Monolithic image BOMs are not editable by users. 
                 User must edit the appropriate Series Software 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BOM to change monolithic BOMs. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.8 
                 ePic will support creation and deployment of MLHD 
                 MLHD configurations are like SKUs that 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 configurations. 
                 include software for more than one 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.8.1 
                 MLHD BOM Template will be automatically generated 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 based on user selected SKU BOM(s) loaded from DB 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Hero or manually created in ePic (see INT-1.12). 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.8.2 
                 MLHD BOM is not manually editable. 
                 User should edit SKU BOM and associated 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Series Software BOM to change MLHD BOM 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 contents. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.8.3 
                 MLHD BOM will be exposed to build system just like 
                 An attribute will allow VOE build system to 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 any other image BOM. 
                 distinguish MLHD BOMs from other images. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.9 
                 Component selector. Allow user to create DB Hero 
                 User can use this function to specify a 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Component lists by selecting DB Hero specs and 
                 configuration or just a set of components. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 classes. 
                 This function is used to specify component-to- 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 release mappings during series SW BOM 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Creation (BOM-1.6) and dummy SKU BOM 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Creation (INT-1.12.2). It is intended to make 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 it easier for users to select components by 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 allowing them to select the same items a 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 customer would in a sales system. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.9.2 
                 If user is creating a configuration, DB Hero constraints 
                 This is necessary to create valid 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 are checked by the system once all selections have been 
                 configurations. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 made. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.9.3 
                 DB Hero spec-to-component relations are used to 
                 Thomas will not implement constraints 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 convert user selected specs/classes to a list of 
                 enforcement which is required for ePic. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 components. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Dropped. VOA must adapt DB Hero 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 deliverables to existing systems and Thomas 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 will not have all required functionality. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.10 
                 Specify Component-to-Release Mappings. One or 
                 These mappings will be included in the 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 more DB Hero Components is mapped to one or more 
                 “installation data file,” and factory tools will 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Releases on a Series SW BOM template. 
                 use these mappings to select the correct 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 releases to install on a configuration based on 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 the list of DB Hero components that make up 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 that configuration (this is a SKU BOM). 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.10.1 
                 If no mappings exist, the system will auto-generate 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 mappings by using planning part associations to resolve 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 which components will be selected. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.10.2 
                 User can use component selector to select additional 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 components to be used in a component/release 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 mapping or select components directly. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.10.3 
                 System will perform sanity checks upon submission of 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 mappings: 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Ensure all SW items on the Series SW BOM have 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 mappings with DB Hero components. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.11 
                 Integrators can request images from non-local file 
                 Images are not synced to other file stores by 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 stores be copies to the local store. 
                 default. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.12 
                 Manage SKU&#39;s. A SKU represents an individual 
                 SKU BOMs are used by the system to auto- 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 configuration. 
                 create monolithic image BOMs (INT-1.7) and 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 MLHD BOMs (INT-1.8). 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 A SKU (stock keeping unit) is a DB Hero part 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 representing a configuration. The part number 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 of such an item is also called SKU or F- 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 number. A SKU BOM is a SKU part with a 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 list of DB Hero component parts representing 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 one configuration as children. 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Some configurations (for retail products) are 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 officially defined in DB Hero. These product 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 configurations are referred to as Fixed SKUs. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.12.1 
                 SKU BOMs are loaded from DB Hero as part of DB 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Hero interface functionality. SKU BOMs contain a 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 SKU item as parent and components as children. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.12.2 
                 User can also manually create SKU&#39;s. User can use 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 the component selector (INT-1.9) to create a SKU 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 BOM. For manually created SKU BOMs, user should 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 specify the SKU Description. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-1.12.3 
                 User cannot edit SKU BOMs originating from DB 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Hero. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.5.2 User Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                   
                 Moved to section 9.4.2, requirement BOM- 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 2.1. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.5.3 Business Rules 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 INT-3.1 
                 Both regional and global of foundation 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 images will be supported by ePic. When 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 reqional images are used, foundation 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 images will be designed and built locally 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 in each engineering division using ePic 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 and local build tools. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.5.4 Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 INT-4.1 
                 Provide image BOM data and software items for 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 VOA&#39;s build environment. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Dropped. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.3 
                 Provide image BOM data and software items for 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 SDNA&#39;s build environment. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.4 
                 Data and functionality will be exposed to build tools 
                 DB Connection will be used by SDNA. VOA 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 via interface DLL. 
                 and VOE will use web services. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.5 
                 Build data will be exported via system interface. 
                 Build data is a snapshot of a BOM template 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 for an engineering part. The interface should 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 expose other data so that the remote user can 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 select snapshots. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.5.1 
                 Data to be exported: 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 Active Series Master 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 LangRegion Master 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Image/module BOM Snapshots 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 All entity attributes 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Binary data (in file store) 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.5.2 
                 Functions to be provided: 
                 Multiple calls required to get BOM. Filtering 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 Authenticate 
                 of data should be done client side. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Get Active Series 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Get LangRegion Master 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Get Composite Parts for Series 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Get Snapshot List for Part 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Get Snapshot BOM 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Get Binary Data for SW Release ID (from 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 file store) 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.6 
                 Check-in functionality will be provided via system 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 interface. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.6.1 
                 Data to be imported: 
                 Part registration is needed since some parts 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 Release attributes 
                 (like “clean” or “base+” OS images) will be 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Binary data (to file store) 
                 auto-created from build tools. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Part Registration 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.6.2 
                 Functions to be provided: 
                 Register part functionality must be available 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 Authenticate 
                 remotely, for example, so that a PIDVD part 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Check-in (to ePic) 
                 (factory media) can be created by build tools 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Upload files (to local file store) 
                 automatically for each monolithic image 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Register Part (to facilitate auto-creation of 
                 created. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 related parts) 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Set default release 
                   
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.7 
                 Config Range must be retrieved from DB Hero. 
                 For INT-1.9. Interface specified in “DB Hero 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Common Interface Protocol Specification 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 2005-07-07”, page 12 and 27. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.8 
                 Constraints must be retrieved from DB Hero. 
                 For INT-1.9. Interface specified in “DB Hero 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Common Interface Protocol Specification 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 2005-07-07”, page 14 and 30. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.9 
                 Spec-to-Component relations must be retrieved from 
                 For INT-1.9. Interface specified in “DB Hero 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 DB Hero. 
                 Common Interface Protocol Specification 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 2005-07-07”, page 17 and 35. 
                   
               
               
                 INT-4.10 
                 All SKU BOMs must be retrieved from DB Hero and 
                 For INT-1.7 SKUs are identified by F- 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 stored in ePic. 
                 number. Interface specified in “DB Hero 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Common Interface Protocol Specification 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 2005-07-07”, page 10 and 24. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.6 Factory Deployment 
     This section captures ePic requirements specific to factory deployment. Some of these requirements extend previously specified functionality. The requirements and data format for the installation data file is captured in section 9.8. 
     5.6.1 Usage Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 MFG-1.1 
                 Snapshot Series Software BOM. This functionality 
                 Snapshots are used for several operations: 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 should be available from the series software BOM 
                 Installation Data File creation, Test Strategy 
               
               
                   
                 management screens. 
                 management. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.1.1 
                 A snapshot can be flagged as a Release Candidate 
                 The latest RC snapshot is used for generating 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 (RC). 
                 Test Strategies. This function would be used 
               
               
                   
                   
                 for the “BOM Freeze” milestone in VOA. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.1.2 
                 User must enter a text version string (or snapshot 
                 For example, “1.0”, “1.1.1-rc”, or “Build 1”. 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 name) for each series software BOM snapshot. This 
                 Business units will decide conventions this 
               
               
                   
                 version string should be unique for Series/LangRegion 
                 field. 
               
               
                   
                 combination. 
                 This is in addition to system generated ID. It 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is used throughout the system and external 
               
               
                   
                   
                 tools as the name of the snapshot. 
               
               
                 MFG.1.2 
                 Issue RTM or Test RTM. RTM&#39;s and Test RTM&#39;s will 
                 Test RTM&#39;s will be used as a mechanism for 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 be issues by Series/LangRegion. 
                 pre-releasing BOMs for PVT events. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.2.1 
                 Only one snapshot for a given Series/LangRegion 
                 This implies that different snapshots could be 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 combination can be flagged as RTM or Test RTM. 
                 used for different LangRegion combinations. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.2.2 
                 System must send when an RTM has been issued in 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 the system. Email must include the following 
               
               
                   
                 information: 
               
               
                   
                 Installation data file name with hyperlink to ePic 
               
               
                   
                 page from which it can be downloaded. 
               
               
                   
                 Name and email of user who issued the RTM. 
               
               
                   
                 Engineering organization of the user. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.3 
                 Running change management. 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                 MFG-1.3.1 
                 If a user issues an RTM against a Series/LangRegion 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 combination for which a RTM snapshot already exists 
               
               
                   
                 the system should warn the user that a previous 
               
               
                   
                 snapshot was RTM&#39;ed and this is a running change. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.3.2 
                 When system sends release mail to users, the mail 
                 For example: 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 should indicate that the change is a running change to 
                 Changes since initial RTM: 
               
               
                   
                 RTM&#39;ed software. In addition to items described in 
                 &lt;part name&gt; &lt;detailed ver.&gt; (&lt;rel. id&gt;) 
               
               
                   
                 MFG-1.2.2 the following items should be included in 
                 [ADDED] 
               
               
                   
                 the mail: 
                 &lt;part name&gt; &lt;detailed ver.&gt; (&lt;rel. id&gt;) 
               
               
                   
                 List of releases added/deleted/changed since initial 
                 [DELETED] 
               
               
                   
                 RTM. Items which are patches (EPCs) should be 
                 &lt;part name&gt; &lt;detailed ver.&gt; (&lt;rel. id&gt;) 
               
               
                   
                 tagged as such. 
                 [CHANGED] 
               
               
                   
                 List of releases added/deleted/changed since the 
                 &lt;part name&gt; &lt;detailed ver.&gt; (&lt;rel. id&gt;) 
               
               
                   
                 last running change release. Items which are 
                 [ADDED] [PATCH] 
               
               
                   
                 patches (EPCs) should be tagged as such. 
                 Changes since last RTM: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 &lt;part name&gt; &lt;detailed ver.&gt; (&lt;rel. id&gt;)) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 [ADDED] 
               
               
                 MFG-1.4 
                 Manage partitioning information. System will provide 
                 This data will be included in the installation 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 functionality for specifying partition sizes for all 
                 data file. 
               
               
                   
                 partitions to be used on production systems. Special 
               
               
                   
                 partitions “recovery” and “system” (or C drive) can be 
               
               
                   
                 defined. “System partition must always be specified. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.4.1 
                 Partitions sizes can be defined for each 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 Series/LangRegion combination. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.4.2 
                 Partition sizes should be specified in MB (megabytes). 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                 MFG-1.4.3 
                 For the recovery partition, user can select “dynamic” 
                 If a partition size is dynamic, installation tools 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 instead of specifying a size. For system partition user 
                 will decide what the size will be. 
               
               
                   
                 can specify “single partition” instead of specifying a 
                 If partition size is “single partition”, then all 
               
               
                   
                 size. 
                 available space remaining on the disk would 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be allocated for the partition. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.4.4 
                 For the “system” partition, user must specify a 
                 This is used in the factory so that a diagnostic 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 minimum size. This is always required. 
                 partition can be created. For single partition 
               
               
                   
                   
                 models the partition size will be extended to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the final size at the end of the factory process. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.4.5 
                 If user selects “dynamic” for recovery partition size, 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 user must also specify “recovery partition installed 
               
               
                   
                 size.” This is the size in MB of all data included in the 
               
               
                   
                 recovery image. It is needed to calculate a dynamic 
               
               
                   
                 partition size. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.4.5 
                 For each partition specified, user must specify a disk 
                 For example, “Disk 1, Partition 2, SYSTEM.” 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 number, partition number, and label name. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.4.6 
                 For each partition specified, user must specify a file 
                 Standard partition types and numbers should 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 system type. This type will be stored as a hexadecimal 
                 be used. 
               
               
                   
                 number, but system should prompt users with partition 
               
               
                   
                 type name. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.5 
                 Factory Media Management. System should provide 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 some addition functionality to facilitate media delivery 
               
               
                   
                 to factories when defining factory media engineering 
               
               
                   
                 parts. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.5.1 
                 System should provide function for auto-creating 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 media BOM based on a series SW BOM snapshot. 
               
               
                   
                 User can select the snapshot (by RTM, Test RTM, 
               
               
                   
                 Latest, or version field) and system will prepare a 
               
               
                   
                 BOM which includes the appropriate installation data 
               
               
                   
                 file. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.5.2 
                 System should provide function for auto-creating a 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 media set containing only files which have changed 
               
               
                   
                 from another media set. User should select two series 
               
               
                   
                 software BOM snapshots. Default is initial RTM&#39;ed 
               
               
                   
                 snapshot and latest RTM&#39;ed snapshot. Appropriate 
               
               
                   
                 installation data file will be included on the BOM. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.5.3 
                 User can manually add/remove releases from the 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 Factory Media BOM. 
               
               
                 MFG-1.6 
                 Miscellaneous IDF data maintenance. Functions for 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 managing data in the IDF not covered elsewhere in this 
               
               
                   
                 document must be provided. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.6.2 User Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 MFG-2.1 
                 RTM/Running Change Wizard. 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                 MFG-2.2 
                 Download Installation Data file. 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.6.3 Business Rules 
       
                                                     ID   Description   Comments   Priority                                                    MFG-3.1   . . .                        
5.6.4 interface Requirements
 
                                                     ID   Description   Comments   Priority                                                MFG-4.1                        
5.7 Installation and Recovery (ePic)
 
These requirements describe ePic functionality required to support software installation and recovery.
 
     5.7.1 Usage Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 INST-1.1 
                 “Installation Data File” (IDF) Management. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 INST-1.1.1 
                 Installation Data File (IDF) must include the following 
                 Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG requirements 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 elements for each Series/LangRegion: 
                 1a-f. 
               
               
                   
                 Minimum tools version number - checked 
                 Factory Install WG 1c and 1f-1 are satisfied 
               
               
                   
                 by tools to ensure the correct version is 
                 since P1 images, patches, and running changes 
               
               
                   
                 being used (configurable value). 
                 are treated like any other module. 
               
               
                   
                 Version number of the installation data 
               
               
                   
                 snapshot. 
               
               
                   
                 The contents of Snyinst.oem. Installation 
               
               
                   
                 order for the modules. 
               
               
                   
                 Mapping of DB Hero components to ePic 
               
               
                   
                 SW releases. 
               
               
                   
                 Data required for the installation tools to 
               
               
                   
                 confirm successful installation of each 
               
               
                   
                 release. 
               
               
                   
                 CRC data for each binary file. 
               
               
                   
                 Total size of each release binary data (used 
               
               
                   
                 for dynamic partition size calculation). 
               
               
                   
                 Path information required to locate binary 
               
               
                   
                 files in the file store and download them 
               
               
                   
                 (via SMB share). 
               
               
                   
                 Partition size information for recovery and 
               
               
                   
                 system partitions. All partition information 
               
               
                   
                 defined in the system should be included 
               
               
                   
                 and a field listing total number of partitions 
               
               
                   
                 defined should be calculated and included 
               
               
                   
                 in the file. 
               
               
                   
                 BIOS time zone offset from GMT by the 
               
               
                   
                 series/LangRegion (e.g., GMT +8, GMT −7). 
               
               
                   
                 For each release included in the file, 
               
               
                   
                 engineering organization for the developer 
               
               
                   
                 who checked-in the release. 
               
               
                   
                 Recovery type (HDD Recovery or media 
               
               
                   
                 only). 
               
               
                   
                 MLHD specific information, if applicable. 
               
               
                   
                 Relevant MCode specification(s). 
               
               
                   
                 List of all software releases and attributes of 
               
               
                   
                 all software releases on the Series SW 
               
               
                   
                 BOM (BLID will be included as an 
               
               
                   
                 attribute of FI releases). 
               
               
                 INST-1.1.3 
                 An installation data file can be automatically 
                 Intended to satisfy Factory Install WG 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 downloaded to a factory file store, it can be retrieved 
                 requirement 3a. 
               
               
                   
                 manually via ePic UI, or it can be retrieved via DLL 
               
               
                   
                 interface. 
               
               
                 INST-1.1.4 
                 Installation data files are generated for each Series 
                 There will be many IDF&#39;s. To make 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Software BOM Snapshot. 
                 management easier special requirements have 
               
               
                   
                   
                 been specified for online (STOR-1.10 and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 STOR-1.14) and offline (MFG-1.5) factory 
               
               
                   
                   
                 deployment methods. 
               
               
                 INST-1.1.5 
                 All users can retrieve the “Test RTM” or “RTM” 
                 Satisfies Factory Install WQ requirement 1f-2. 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 version of the installation data file for a given series. 
               
               
                   
                 Sony users can additionally retrieve the “latest” 
               
               
                   
                 snapshot of an installation data file. 
               
               
                 INST-1.1.6 
                 Each installation data file must have a unique name 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 with the unique identifier included in the name. 
               
               
                 INST-1.2 
                 “RTM”, “Test RTM”, and “latest” snapshots of 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 installation data can be generated and stored in the 
               
               
                   
                 system. 
               
               
                 INST-1.3 
                 Installation data will be “cycle-less.” Installation data 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 will support all cycles for a given series. 
               
               
                 INST-1.4 
                 All users must have a system account to access these 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 services. 
               
               
                 INST-1.5 
                 Third party users should have access only to data 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 relevant to them. Data will be restricted by series (see 
               
               
                   
                 ADM-1.3). 
               
               
                 INST-1.6 
                 MCode management. 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                 INST-1.6.2 
                 A MCode specification (bit mapping to software 
                 This means that MCodes can be duplicated with 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 releases) is defined for each Recovery Media Set. 
                 each instance having different meanings. 
               
               
                 INST-1.6.3 
                 The system will generate a MCode specification once 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 the Recovery Media Set BOM and Series SW BOM 
               
               
                   
                 for the associated series&#39; are complete. This function 
               
               
                   
                 can be re-run if the BOM changes and existing MCode 
               
               
                   
                 Mappings will not be affected. 
               
               
                 INST-1.6.4 
                 The system can calculate a MCode given a list of SW 
                 Satisfies VBD Factory Install WG requirement 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 releases or a list of DB Hero components representing 
                 2c. 
               
               
                   
                 a single configuration. 
               
               
                 INST-1.6.5 
                 The system can calculate the list of software based on a 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 given MCode. 
               
               
                 INST-1.6.5.1 
                 User can produce a list of software from an encrypted 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 MCode or unencrypted MCode. If the MCode is 
               
               
                   
                 encrypted, user must also enter a UUID (text string) to 
               
               
                   
                 facilitate decryption. 
               
               
                 INST-1.6.6 
                 The system can calculate a MCode based on a SKU 
                 System must first convert list of DB Hero 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 BOM (user defined or from DB Hero) defined in the 
                 components to a list of software releases to 
               
               
                   
                 system. 
                 accomplish this. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 A SKU BOM must be used, because 
               
               
                   
                   
                 calculating a valid MCode requires that DB 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Hero constraints have been enforced for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 configuration (see Component Selector, INT- 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1.9). 
               
               
                 INST-1.6.6.1 
                 User can optionally generate an encrypted MCode by 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 entering a UUID in the system. 
               
               
                 INST-1.6.7 
                 The MCode specification will be included in the 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 installation data file. 
               
               
                 INST-1.7 
                 Recovery Media Planner. Users can define a BOM 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 template for a Recovery Media Engineering Part using 
               
               
                   
                 a wizard or form. 
               
               
                 INST-1.7.1 
                 User selects the Series and LangRegion for which the 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 recovery media will be created. User can optionally 
               
               
                   
                 must select an OS, as well. 
               
               
                 INST-1.7.2 
                 System will auto create a Recovery Media BOM 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 template. This function is identical to Series Software 
               
               
                   
                 BOM auto-generation except that it is also constrained 
               
               
                   
                 by OS selection. 
               
               
                 INST-1.7.2.1 
                 User can manually add/remove engineering 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 parts/release/groups to the BOM template. 
               
               
                 INST-1.7.2.2 
                 User can create snapshots of the Recovery Media BOM 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 template. Requirements are the same as for Series 
               
               
                   
                 Software BOM. 
               
               
                 INST-1.7.2.3 
                 A function for comparing Recovery media BOM 
                 Recovery Media BOM&#39;s and Series SW 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 snapshots to series SW BOM snapshots should be 
                 BOM&#39;s (their lifecycles are different) are not 
               
               
                   
                 available. Differences should be shown to the user. 
                 directly related. This function is necessary so 
               
               
                   
                   
                 that users can reconcile differences. 
               
               
                 INST-1.8 
                 The ePic component selector function must provide a 
                 This is just a button or hyperlink. 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 function for issuing an HTTP GET or POST to the 
                 This function cannot yet be merged into ePic 
               
               
                   
                 OASIS system in the VOA (This system generates 
                 because it is heavily tied to VSMS and legacy 
               
               
                   
                 MCode writing floppy disks for Sony personnel around 
                 support will be required for a while. This can 
               
               
                   
                 the world). The HTTP request will include an 
                 eventually be convened to a standalone tool 
               
               
                   
                 unencrypted MCode and any other data necessary to 
                 which runs alongside ePic once the VSMS 
               
               
                   
                 produce a MCode floppy in OASIS. 
                 dependencies can be lifted. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.7.2 User Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 INST-2.1 
                 Recovery media planner (wizard). 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 INST-2.1.1 
                 Select Series, LangRegion, and OS. One or more of 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 any of these items may be selected. Set media specific 
               
               
                   
                 attributes. 
               
               
                 INST-2.1.2 
                 System auto-generates media BOM. Show software 
                 Series SW BOM is required for auto- 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 releases and media layout. Allow user to add items to 
                 generation. If it is unavailable, user may 
               
               
                   
                 BOM. Items generated from Series SW BOM cannot 
                 create BOM from scratch. 
               
               
                   
                 be edited. 
               
               
                 INST-2.1.3 
                 Generate MCode bit mappings. System stores bit 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 mappings. Existing bit mappings are frozen if any 
               
               
                   
                 Series/LangRegion assigned to media set it RTM&#39;ed. 
               
               
                   
                 Additional mappings may be created post-RTM. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.7.3 Business Rules 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 INST-3.1 
                 MCode format will be changed: 
               
               
                   
                 Current MCode space occupied by 
               
               
                   
                 PCODE will be replaced with a 
               
               
                   
                 MCode Spec identifier. 
               
               
                   
                 All remaining bits will be used for 
               
               
                   
                 algorithmic mapping bits to 
               
               
                   
                 software items. There will no 
               
               
                   
                 longer be HW/SW MCode - 
               
               
                   
                 only SW MCode. 
               
               
                 INST-3.2 
                 HDD recovery and recovery from 
               
               
                   
                 customer created recovery media 
               
               
                   
                 will not be dependent on MCode. 
               
               
                   
                 MCode is required only for recovery 
               
               
                   
                 using Sony supplied recovery media 
               
               
                   
                 (as defined in ePic). 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.7.4 Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 INST-4.1 
                 . . . 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.7.5 MCode Specification Changes 
     5.7.5.1 Current MCode Implementation 
     5.7.5.2 New MCode Implementation 
     Changes: 
     
         
         
           
             Number of bits available for software will increase from 48 to 80. 
             PCode value will be replaced with an ePic “MCode Spec” identifier, 
             Recovery tools will require only MCode and installation data file (included on media) to recovery a machine. Reliance on any other DMI fields will be eliminated. 
           
         
       
    
     Installation Data File Mockup 
       
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 &lt;?xml version=″1.0″ encoding=″UTF-8″&gt; 
               
               
                 &lt;InstallationDataFile&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 // Versioning information and other top level data 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Header&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;Series name=″″/&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;LangRegion name=″″/&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;BomSnapshot id=″″ versionString=″″/&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;MinimumToolVersion version=″″ /&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/Header&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 // List of DB Hero component ID to SW release mappings 
               
               
                   
                 // (created as part of Series Software BOM management) 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;ComponentReleaseMap&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;Mapping&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;ComponentIDList/&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;ReleaseIDList/&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/Mapping&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 ... 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/ComponentReleaseMap&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 // List of MCode bit mappings 
               
               
                   
                 // MCode spec by recovery media set or Series/LangRegion/OS 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;MCodeSpec&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;OperatingSystem id=””&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;Mapping&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;MCode bitmask=″″ value=″″/&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;ReleaseIDList/&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/Mapping&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 ... 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/OperatingSystem&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 ... 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/MCodeSpec&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 // Partition Data 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;ParitionInfo/&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 // List of all releases and their attributes for the Series/LangRegion 
               
               
                   
                 // (includes BIOS/Firmware releases) 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;SeriesSoftwareBom&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;Release id=″″ blid=″″ ...&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;SetupCommand/&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Dependencies/&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/Release&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 ... 
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 &lt;/SeriesSoftwareBom&gt; 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 &lt;/InstallationDataFile&gt; 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.8 Installation and Recovery (Tools) 
     As part of the requirements process global modular and recovery specifications will be defined. These requirements describe changes that must be made to US installation and recovery tools in order to work with ePic. These tools will become the global Installation and Recovery Toolset. 
     5.8.1 Usage Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 TOOL-1.1 
                 Image and Module part types can be downloaded and 
                 Requirements TEST-1.1 to TEST-1.4 satisfy 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 installed automatically using the same tools to be used 
                 QA WG requirements for network installation 
               
               
                   
                 in the factory. 
                 item 2. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Patches and running changes are “Modules” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and are thus included. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.2 
                 Installation without a Series SW BOM must be 
                 This functionality should be provided on a 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 supported. 
                 boot CD. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Software list building/storing functional 
               
               
                   
                   
                 requirements added to ePic per 2005-9-15 
               
               
                   
                   
                 VBD review. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.3 
                 Installation of a clean OS should be possible. 
                 VBD QA WG Requirement. 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 This is for early SW development (of drivers, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 for example). ePic will allow such images to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be checked in and users can use QA 
               
               
                   
                   
                 installation tools to image units. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.4 
                 BIOS/Firmware and tools (e.g., to burn BIOS, write 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 firmware or write DMI) part types should be 
               
               
                   
                 downloaded automatically. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.5 
                 BIOS/Firmware parts should be automatically 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 installable. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.6 
                 Release Notes and Bug Lists for all parts can be 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 automatically downloaded. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.7 
                 Paper manual contents can be automatically 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 downloaded. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.8 
                 QA download and installation services and tools must 
                 Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 be available worldwide to VAIO engineering groups, 
                 installation item 3 and 5c. 
               
               
                   
                 outsourced QA groups, and ODMs. 
                 Detailed list of users is included in the original 
               
               
                   
                   
                 document. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.9 
                 Tools should check the minimum required version in 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 the installation data file and should return an error if 
               
               
                   
                 they are a lower version. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.10 
                 Tools will determine install order based on data from 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 ePic. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.11 
                 Tools must operate in WinXP and WinPE. 
                 Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 installation item 5e and 2i. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.12 
                 Tools must implement function to convert an MCode to 
                 This enables the distribution of MCodes to 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 a list of software releases (using the installation data 
                 factory for Fixed SKU production, and it 
               
               
                   
                 file) and vice versa. 
                 enables calculation of MCodes on the fly by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 installation tools during the modular 
               
               
                   
                   
                 installation process. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.13 
                 Unique ID of each software release must be verified 
                 Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 3a. 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 after installation. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.14 
                 Installation tools must be able to detect whether a 
                 Satisfies VBD QA WG requirement 3b. 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 module successfully installed. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.15 
                 Installation tools should support automatic creation of a 
                 Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 target environment on a machine. 
                 installation item 5a. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.15.1 
                 Target environment includes an HDD image. 
                 Assumption is that this is a foundation image. 
                 3 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.15.2 
                 Target environment includes firmware and BIOS 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 updates. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.15.3 
                 Target environment includes updating of DMI data. 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.16 
                 Installation tools must have locking mechanism so that 
                 Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 they only work on Sony PCs. 
                 installation item 5b. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.17 
                 QA installation can be initiated using a WinPE boot 
                 Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 CD. 
                 installation item 5d. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.18 
                 Installation tools must work in Windows. 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.19 
                 Installation tools must support preparing recovery 
                 Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 partition only without performing full install. 
                 installation. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.20 
                 An automated system should exist that can scan 
                 This would help facilitate Test System data 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 hardware data for test systems and load it into ePic 
                 entry. 
               
               
                   
                 through a network connection. 
                 WMI based configuration checking 
               
               
                   
                   
                 implementation could be used to satisfy this 
               
               
                   
                   
                 requirement. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.21 
                 A DLL should be provided that utilizes MCode 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 encoding/decoding and MCode decryption/encryption. 
               
               
                 TOOL-1.22 
                 Three use cases for installation tools will be supported: 
               
               
                   
                 1. Installation using a list of DB Hero 
               
               
                   
                 component part numbers. 
               
               
                   
                 a. Convert list of component part 
               
               
                   
                 numbers to list of software 
               
               
                   
                 releases. 
               
               
                   
                 b. Generate MCode using list of 
               
               
                   
                 software releases (optional - 
               
               
                   
                 could be done offline). 
               
               
                   
                 c. Install software. 
               
               
                   
                 2. Installation using a MCode. 
               
               
                   
                 a. Generate list of software 
               
               
                   
                 releases using MCode. 
               
               
                   
                 b. Install software. 
               
               
                   
                 3. Installation using a list of releases. 
               
               
                   
                 a. Generate MCode (optional - 
               
               
                   
                 could be done offline). 
               
               
                   
                 b. Install software. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.8.2 User Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 TOOL-2.1 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.8.3 Business Rules 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                 TOOL- 
                 For the use cases defined in TOOL-1.22: 
               
               
                 3.1 
                 Factory Installation will use method #1 
               
               
                   
                 only. For retail models the DB Hero 
               
               
                   
                 component part number list can 
               
               
                   
                 be prepared offline and distributed 
               
               
                   
                 at RTM time. 
               
               
                   
                 Recovery Media Sets (RDVDs or 
               
               
                   
                 Fulfillment Media) will use method #2. 
               
               
                   
                 HDD Recovery and recovery using 
               
               
                   
                 customer created media will use method 
               
               
                   
                 #3. 
               
               
                   
                 Test system preparation will use all 
               
               
                   
                 three methods. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.8.4 Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 TOOL-4.1 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.9 File Store/Mini-ePic 
     5.9.1 Usage Requirements 
       
                                         ID   Description   Comments   Priority                          Moved to Business Rules section.                   Moved to Business Rules section.       STOR-1.3   New module and application releases will automatically       1           be synced with other engineering file stores. Images           will not.       STOR-1.4   Sony user can request that images from another       1           engineering file store be transferred to their local file           store via ePic UI.       STOR-1.5   Factory engineers can automatically sync their local file   File store solution would thus require a   3           store by providing installation data file to   function for parsing the installation data file.           synchronization tool.       STOR-1.5.1   All binary data required will be automatically       3           downloaded to factory file store according to           installation data file.       STOR-1.5.2   Obsolete releases will be automatically deleted from   The “delete obsolete files” function is intended   3           factory file store according to installation data file.   for factory use. Factories will usually only           This function can be optionally disabled.   require latest RTM&#39;ed releases. Obsolete               releases would be any releases that were               removed/replaced in the installation data file.               Such a function ensures that factories will               never need to allocate more storage than is               absolutely necessary to the file store.       STOR-1.5.3   Factory engineers can only download “RTM” or “Test       3           RTM” releases as indicated in the installation data file           they receive.       STOR-1.6   For each release, one or more files and directories can       1           be checked into file store.       STOR-1.6.1   During release check-in, upload process should be a   User should not have to zip up files or FTP   1           fully automated and atomic operation.   them anywhere.       STOR-1.7   During a download operation, the total size of the files       3           to be downloaded can be reported to the user before the           download starts.       STOR-1.8   Users must be able to load binary data into the file   Some factories will receive images and   3           store from media.   modules on DVD (factory media set).       STOR-1.9   User must be able to operate the file store without a   Perhaps factory file store can work with just   1           database connection to ePic.   installation data file. Engineering stores may               use database connection to acknowledge               check-in(s) and perform other advanced               functions.       STOR-1.10   File store will provide a function for downloading latest   This function is for factories.   3           installation data file for a Series/LangRegion. The           Series/LangRegion list for this function should be kept           in a configuration file and downloads should be           manually triggered.       STOR-1.10.1   User should be able to view/download the list of       3           changes (the same as in requirement MFG-1.3.2) when           the file store download is triggered.       STOR-1.11   The file store solution should be deliverable as an   Package is sent with user manual and required   1           easily installable package with a simple configuration   configuration parameters.           file.       STOR-1.12   The file store solution should be deployable to a wide   File store users will have more flexibility in   1           range of system architectures.   hardware selection or they can leverage               existing infrastructure.       STOR-1.13   File and directory management.       1                   1       STOR-1.13.2   Files should be stored in a flat file structure with each   It is acceptable to have a few directories on the   1           file uniquely named.   file store, as long as it is human navigable.               Files could be named as the release ID with               type prefix.       STOR-1.14   A factory file store can be synchronized based on the   Intended to satisfy Factory Install WG   3           installation data file.   requirement 3b and 3d.       STOR-1.15   Files and directories (binary data) in the file store   Satisfies Factory Install WG requirement 3c.   1           should be uniquely named.                    
5.9.2 User interface Requirements
 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 STOR-2.1 
                 Solution should be command-line 
                 Operations can 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 based. Some functions may be 
                 be scripted. No 
               
               
                   
                 implemented in a daemon. 
                 graphical UI 
               
               
                   
                   
                 required. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.9.3 Business Rules 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 STOR-3.1 
                 Any business unit requiring a file store will be 
                 Storage requirements will vary for each 
                   
               
               
                   
                 responsible for purchasing and maintaining hardware. 
                 installation. 
               
               
                 STOR-3.2 
                 Any non-GM software must be available for a specified 
                 Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 
               
               
                   
                 period of time (e.g. 100 days) after the GM version has 
                 installation item 4. 
               
               
                   
                 been released. 
               
               
                 STOR-3.3 
                 Golden Master (GM) SW releases must be available 
                 Satisfies QA WG requirements for network 
               
               
                   
                 for an indefinite period of time. 
                 installation item 4. 
               
               
                   
                 If indefinite period is impossible one of the following: 
               
               
                   
                 By the end of OS support period. 
               
               
                   
                 By the end of product support period. 
               
               
                   
                 By the end of key parts availability for HW services. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.9.4 Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 STOR-4.1 
                 File store must communicate with other 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 file stores. 
               
               
                 STOR-4.2 
                 Files stores must authenticate before 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 connecting to another file store or 
               
               
                   
                 ePic for any reason. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     5.10 Test Management and Defect Tracking 
     The following key concepts are central to ePic Test Management and Defect Tracking functionality:
         Test Case: Unit test case associated with a single hardware or software item.   Test Case Strategy: A collection of test cases for a series or engineering part/major version. Partially auto-generated based on the releases on a series software BOM. The test case strategy changes over time as items on the series software BOM change.   Defect: A flaw of a software or hardware item. Defects can be linked to test cases or standalone.   Test System: A PC used for testing. ePic will track the configurations of test systems.       

     9.11.1 Usage Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 TEST-1.1 
                 Three primary system roles are used for the 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 Test/Defect components of ePic: “Project Test 
               
               
                   
                 Lead,” “Test Lead,” and “Tester.” 
               
               
                 TEST-1.1.1 
                 Only “Project Test Leads” and “Test Leads” can 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 create/edit Test Cases and create/edit Test Strategies. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.1.2 
                 Testers can update the results of a Test Case or 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 create/edit defects. Testers can edit Test Case 
               
               
                   
                 definitions if they have been added to the owner list 
               
               
                   
                 for the Test Case by a Test Lead or Project Test 
               
               
                   
                 Lead. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.1.3 
                 Developers and Integrators can update status and 
                 “Fix-verified” resolution is used to confirm 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 resolution of defects, but cannot set resolution of 
                 regression tests were successful. 
               
               
                   
                 defects to “Fix-verified.” 
               
               
                 TEST-1.1.4 
                 Any user with an assigned role in the system can 
                 Authenticated users without roles are given 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 enter a defect in open status. 
                 read-only access to all parts of the system. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.2 
                 Defect management. 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                 TEST-1.2.1 
                 Defects can be associated with one or more 
                 Thus for hardware defects, DB Hero part 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 engineering part/major versions, releases, series, or 
                 numbers are used, and for software defects 
               
               
                   
                 hardware parts. Defects cannot be associated with 
                 (including BIOS and firmware) ePic part 
               
               
                   
                 software planning parts from DB Hero. 
                 numbers are used. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.2.2 
                 If a user chooses to associate a defect with a series, 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 the user should then have the option of selecting 
               
               
                   
                 releases from the series software BOM (if available). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.2.3 
                 Before entering a defect, the user should be able to 
                 Search functions should be accessible from the 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 search existing defects to ensure that duplicates or 
                 create defect view. 
               
               
                   
                 similar defects do not already exist. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.2.4 
                 Defects can be associated with one or more Test 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 Systems. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.2.4 
                 Defects must be associated with Test Cases if they 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 are discovered as part of testing (see requirements 
               
               
                   
                 TEST-2.1.4). Defects can also manually be 
               
               
                   
                 associated with a test case. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.2.5 
                 Any changes made to an existing defect should be 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 captured in a history log. The user, date/time, and 
               
               
                   
                 attributes changed should be captured. Changes to 
               
               
                   
                 values for status and resolution of defect should be 
               
               
                   
                 tracked in the history log. For other attributes values 
               
               
                   
                 do not need to be tracked. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.2.6 
                 Users checking-in new part releases are required to 
                 This will be required for ALL users who check 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 update the status and resolution of any open defects 
                 in releases regardless of whether their 
               
               
                   
                 linked against that part/major version. 
                 organization uses the Test Mgmt/Defect 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Tracking functions of ePic. This is critical for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 correctly assessing the quality level in any 
               
               
                   
                   
                 release on the series SW BOM, as will as 
               
               
                   
                   
                 auto-generating the regression portion of a 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Test Strategy. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.2.6.1 
                 System will display a table of open defects and allow 
                 It is preferred that notes entry be a separate 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 user to enter status, resolution, and notes for each 
                 screen invoked by a link to facilitate a more 
               
               
                   
                 defect. 
                 compact UI. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.2.6.2 
                 If user sets defect resolution to “Will Not Fix” or 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 “Deferred” a note is required. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.3 
                 Foundation Image (FI) Defect Propagation Tool. 
                 This is a special purpose function required 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                   
                 because each FI is defined as separate 
               
               
                   
                   
                 engineering part in ePic, but defects found in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the FI will often apply to many FIs (for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 example, defects cause by build tools). It is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 intended to be used by integrators/image 
               
               
                   
                   
                 builders as opposed to QA personnel. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.3.1 
                 System displays all open defects against foundation 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 images and a table of all active foundation image 
               
               
                   
                 engineering parts and releases. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.3.2 
                 Attributes displayed for foundation images facilitate 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 dimensional analysis to identify other FIs affected by 
               
               
                   
                 a defect. User can sort table by column or filter table 
               
               
                   
                 by column values. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.3.3 
                 User can select one defect and one or more releases 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 in the FI table and assign the defect to all selected 
               
               
                   
                 FIs. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.4 
                 Create/edit test system. User can define test systems 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 (PCs used for testing software and hardware) in ePic. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.4.1 
                 Each BOM should include a list of basic categories 
                 Such categories are maintained in DB Hero as 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 to help user create test BOM: CPU, HDD, ODD, 
                 an attribute of parts called “Classification.” 
               
               
                   
                 Motherboard, LCD, etc. Parts for specific categories 
                 This attribute should be used for this function. 
               
               
                   
                 are not required to be entered; these categories are 
               
               
                   
                 used only as filters for the hardware parts list. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.4.2 
                 The user can create a BOM for the hardware (DB 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 Hero HW parts) and Firmware (ePic eng. parts) in a 
               
               
                   
                 test system. User can browse parts by series or 
               
               
                   
                 description. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.4.3 
                 The user should be able to define addition parts on a 
                 Sometimes users must substitute parts that are 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 test system BOM template that are not included in 
                 not on the DB Hero BOM in the test system. 
               
               
                   
                 DB Hero part lists. User defined parts will only be 
                 User defined HW parts would use the same 
               
               
                   
                 available for test system management. User defined 
                 attributes as DB Hero HW parts. 
               
               
                   
                 parts will use the same categories as normal DB 
                 This function will also be used for special 
               
               
                   
                 Hero parts. 
                 items which must appear on the RTM report, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 like firmware versions. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.4.4 
                 User can use parts from more than one series on a 
                 Appropriate parts may not be available so user 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 test system BOM. 
                 should be able to use any part in test systems. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.4.5 
                 When a defect is related to a test system, the test 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 system BOM template and other data is 
               
               
                   
                 automatically snapshotted. The snapshot must be 
               
               
                   
                 related to the defect. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.4.6 
                 DMI settings for each test system must be stored in 
                 This data is included on RTM report. This 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 ePic. The user can enter the values for a set of keys. 
                 data is output from the SXSYSINF tool 
               
               
                   
                 The keys required are “Manufacturer,” “Model 
                 maintained by System Engineering. Keys 
               
               
                   
                 Name,” “BIOS Lock ID,” “MCode (Un-encrypted),” 
                 must be kept in sync with the development of 
               
               
                   
                 “MCode Tool Version (CDS Models Only),” “BIOS 
                 this tool. 
               
               
                   
                 Information,” “Universal Information.” Keys should 
               
               
                   
                 be configurable (no admin screen necessary). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.4.7 
                 User can associate a test BOM or SKU BOM with a 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 test system. This BOM will be used to image the 
               
               
                   
                 system. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.5 
                 Test Case Management. 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                 TEST-1.5.1 
                 Test Cases can be associated with a series or 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 engineering part/major version combo. An 
               
               
                   
                 association is not required. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.5.1.1 
                 A Test Case result (Pass/Fail/Impeded/Not Tested) 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 can be stored for each combination of series and part 
               
               
                   
                 release. Results are not stored unless the test case is 
               
               
                   
                 added to a test strategy (default is “Not Tested”). A 
               
               
                   
                 text note and timestamp must be stored for each 
               
               
                   
                 result entered in the system. User should be able to 
               
               
                   
                 retrieve the Test Case result history for a test case for 
               
               
                   
                 a given Test Strategy or Release. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.5.1.2 
                 Test cases have the following categories: 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 Basic, Ad-hoc, Use Case, Compatibility, FIV, 
               
               
                   
                 Benchmarks, MDA, Screen Shot Capture, 
               
               
                   
                 Accessory, Business Unit, and Other. Some 
               
               
                   
                 categories have special requirements. See 
               
               
                   
                 description of categories in section 9.11.5.1. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.5.1.2.1 
                 Benchmark and MDA Tests results include admin 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 defined category/key sets. Category, Key, and the 
               
               
                   
                 Value stored are all text fields. Categories should 
               
               
                   
                 have names and long descriptions. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.5.1.2.2 
                 Only users with admin privileges can define key 
                 These keys change regularly but infrequently. 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 names to be used for Benchmark and MDA testing. 
                 An admin screen (not config file) is required 
               
               
                   
                   
                 for this function. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.5.1.2.3 
                 Screen Shot Capture tests can have an image file 
                 This is a special test case used for the RTM 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 (.JPG, .PNG, or .BMP) attached to it. 
                 report. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.5.1.2.4 
                 Compatibility Tests can have a list of required parts 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 attached to them. This is a text field filled out 
               
               
                   
                 manually. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.5.1.3 
                 For all test cases “Level” can be set. Levels can be 1, 
                 This attribute is used in Test Strategy 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 2, 3, or “Sampling/Sanity Check” (see section 10.4.8, 
                 generation functions (see below). 
               
               
                   
                 TST-13). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.5.1.4 
                 Test Case data for a single test case can be exported 
                 Per VOE review, 2005-11-10. 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 to an Excel spreadsheet. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.6 
                 Users can define named Test Case Groups. 
                 Functionality is similar but not identical to 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                   
                 groups used in software BOM creation. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.6.1 
                 Test Case Groups can be public or private. Private 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 groups are visible only to the user that created the 
               
               
                   
                 group. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.6.2 
                 Test Case Groups can be assigned to the same 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 entities as Test Cases. Such assignments are used as 
               
               
                   
                 defaults when a user creates a new test within a 
               
               
                   
                 group. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7 
                 Test Strategy Management. 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.1 
                 Each series defined in the system will have a test 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 strategy associated with it by default. A series test 
               
               
                   
                 strategy is a list of test cases and/or defect 
               
               
                   
                 regressions to be executed against the latest series 
               
               
                   
                 software BOM snapshot for that series. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.2 
                 User can create and ad-hoc named test strategy to 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 facilitate pre-integration testing. This test strategy 
               
               
                   
                 can be associated with exactly one engineering 
               
               
                   
                 part/major version. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.3 
                 Test cases and defect regressions can belong to more 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 than one test strategy. Test case can be added to a 
               
               
                   
                 strategy only once (no duplicates allowed). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4 
                 Test strategy auto-update and editing: Test strategies 
                 Only project test leads can perform these 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 are partially auto-updated when a Project Test Lead 
                 activities. 
               
               
                   
                 accesses the test strategy for a given 
               
               
                   
                 Series/LangRegion combination. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.1 
                 For series test strategies, if a new series software 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 BOM snapshot has been changed or if the status of 
               
               
                   
                 the snapshot has been changed to Release Candidate 
               
               
                   
                 (RC), the system will auto-update the test strategy for 
               
               
                   
                 any releases or that have changed since the last time 
               
               
                   
                 the test strategy was generated. Release for 
               
               
                   
                 composite parts will be recursively processed 
               
               
                   
                 (system will examine the BOMs for each composite 
               
               
                   
                 part, including FIs). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.2 
                 For ad-hoc test strategies the system will examine the 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 associated engineering part. Composite parts will be 
               
               
                   
                 recursively processed. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.3 
                 Auto-update of test strategies is performed only for 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 the selected LangRegion. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.4 
                 1 st  build (release) test strategy auto-update: 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 Triggered for the first release checked-in for the first 
               
               
                   
                 major version of an engineering part. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.4.1 
                 Level 1 and 2 test cases associated with the 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 series/part and Level 1 and 2 test cases with no 
               
               
                   
                 associations are added to the test strategy. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.4.2 
                 User can manually add level 3 test cases and test case 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 groups. User can remove any auto-added test cases. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.5 
                 Minor revision test strategy auto-update: Triggered 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 for any new releases/defaults which are not the first 
               
               
                   
                 release. Test cases are updated as follows: 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.5.1 
                 Defect regressions are added to the test strategy: 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 Defects with resolution “Fixed” which are associated 
               
               
                   
                 with the current engineering part/major version or 
               
               
                   
                 any of its releases are added to the test strategy as 
               
               
                   
                 “defect regressions.” There are no test cases 
               
               
                   
                 associated with defect regressions (though there may 
               
               
                   
                 be test cases associated with the defect itself, they are 
               
               
                   
                 not used here). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.5.2 
                 System adds test cases for any open defects against 
                 If defects matching the criteria do not have 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 the current engineering part/major version with 
                 associated test cases then they are ignored by 
               
               
                   
                 Priority of “Must Fix” or “Should fix.” Test cases 
                 the system. 
               
               
                   
                 for open defects with Priority equal to “None” and 
               
               
                   
                 Severity equal to “1” are also added to the test 
               
               
                   
                 strategy. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.6 
                 Major Revision test strategy auto-update: Triggered 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 for the first release checked in against a major 
               
               
                   
                 version that is not the first major version. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.6.1 
                 Defect regressions are added to the test strategy: 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 Defects with resolution “Fixed” which are associated 
               
               
                   
                 with the previous engineering part/major version or 
               
               
                   
                 any of its releases are added to the test strategy as 
               
               
                   
                 “defect regressions.” There are no test cases 
               
               
                   
                 associated with defect regressions (though there may 
               
               
                   
                 be test cases associated with the defect itself, they are 
               
               
                   
                 not used here). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.6.2 
                 System adds test cases for any open defects against 
                 If defects matching the criteria do not have 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 the previous engineering part/major version with 
                 associated test cases then they are ignored by 
               
               
                   
                 Priority of “Must Fix” or “Should fix.” Test cases 
                 the system. 
               
               
                   
                 for open defects with Priority equal to “None” and 
               
               
                   
                 Severity equal to “1” are also added to the test 
               
               
                   
                 strategy. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.7 
                 Final build test strategy auto-update: Triggered 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 whenever the latest series software BOM snapshot 
               
               
                   
                 has been flagged as a Release Candidate (does not 
               
               
                   
                 apply to ad-hoc test strategies). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.7.1 
                 System adds Compatibility, FIV, and Screen Shot 
                 If a new snapshot has been generated and them 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 Capture Test Cases to the test strategy. 
                 flagged as an RC before the test strategy has 
               
               
                   
                   
                 been auto-updated, the system should also run 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the appropriate auto-update tasks. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.8 
                 User can re-initiate test strategy auto-update 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 manually at any time. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.4.9 
                 When an auto-update executes, system should 
                 For example, using color coding. 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 display changes (test case adds, deletes, and status 
               
               
                   
                 changes) to the user visually. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.5 
                 User can select a part on the test strategy and view all 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 open defects. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.5.1 
                 User can add test cases associated with open defects 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 to the test strategy. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.5.2 
                 User can add the defect as a defect regression 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 (implies changing status to “closed” and resolution to 
               
               
                   
                 “fixed”). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.6 
                 User can add/delete any test case or test group from a 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 test strategy (even if the test case was added as part 
               
               
                   
                 of an auto-update action). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.6.1 
                 If a level 1 or regression test case is deleted, a 
                 Only one warning should be displayed for 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 warning/confirmation dialog is displayed to the user. 
                 multiple selections. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.6.2 
                 A note indicating that level 1 or regression test cases 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 were deleted from a test strategy, and who deleted it 
               
               
                   
                 when, should be added to the history log. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.7 
                 System should invalidate (set to “pending”) any test 
                 This will only be done for Series Test 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 case result for parts if a new release for a part on 
                 Strategies, not Ad-Hoc ones. 
               
               
                   
                 which they depend (based on dependencies defined 
               
               
                   
                 in ePic) has been checked in. The invalidated test 
               
               
                   
                 cases should be indicated (highlighted) for the user 
               
               
                   
                 on screen. Results of the previous test case result 
               
               
                   
                 should be retained by the system for reference. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.8 
                 Leads can assign Test Cases on a Test Strategy to 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 individual testers. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.9 
                 User can attach one or more test BOMs created using 
                 A test BOM can be extracted from the system 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 the function described in section 9.4.1, requirement 
                 via interface and used by installation tools to 
               
               
                   
                 BOM-1.9. 
                 prepare a test system. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.10 
                 User can attach one or more SKUs to the test strategy 
                 The BOM associated with the SKU can be 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 which have been created using the function described 
                 extracted from the system via interface and 
               
               
                   
                 in section 9.6.1, requirement INT-1.12. 
                 used by installation tools to prepare a test 
               
               
                   
                   
                 system. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.11 
                 When a tester accesses a test strategy, the system will 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 display test cases/defect regressions assigned to that 
               
               
                   
                 user, and any test cases/defect regressions not 
               
               
                   
                 assigned to any user. Tester can update the result of 
               
               
                   
                 each test case and the status/resolution or each defect 
               
               
                   
                 displayed. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.12 
                 Test must select the Test System used before any test 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 results can be changed. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.7.13 
                 System must provide a view of a test strategies by 
                 See RPT-21. 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 active series which displays the percentage of test 
               
               
                   
                 cases completed. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.8 
                 System must provide function to escalate defect to 
                 This requires an interface to the VELSUN 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 VELSUN (global sustaining system). 
                 system maintained by SDNA. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.9 
                 System must provide function to push defect to 
                 This requires an interface to the VALSUN 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 VALSUN (software defect system used by 
                 system maintained by SDNA. 
               
               
                   
                 SDNA/VBD). 
               
               
                 TEST-1.10 
                 Reports currently provided by VSMS for CISC must 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 be available in ePic. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.11 
                 All notes/text area fields should provide advanced 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 editing functionality. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.11.1 
                 Spell checker functionality should be available. 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                 TEST-1.11.2 
                 Formatting functionality as follows: 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 Bullets 
               
               
                   
                 Numbered lists 
               
               
                   
                 Color text 
               
               
                   
                 Font selection 
               
               
                 TEST-1.11.3 
                 Formatting applied in edit screens should be 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 maintained for reports. 
               
               
                 TEST-1.12 
                 Benchmark/MDA Field editor. User can define 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 delete keys used for Benchmark/MDA test case 
               
               
                   
                 categories. Only users with admin privileges can use 
               
               
                   
                 this function. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.11.2 User Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 TEST-2.1 
                 User interfaces for viewing test cases/strategies should 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 provide efficient means for updating data. 
               
               
                 TEST-2.1.1 
                 List of test cases and defect regressions should be 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 displayed in upper right panel. Test cases can be 
               
               
                   
                 marked as pass/fail and defect resolution can be 
               
               
                   
                 changed in this panel without opening other windows, 
               
               
                   
                 only scrolling and clicking. 
               
               
                 TEST-2.1.2 
                 Facilitating for updating multiple test cases should be 
                 For example, check boxes for selecting test 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 provided. 
                 cases and action buttons that apply attribute 
               
               
                   
                   
                 changes to all select test cases. 
               
               
                 TEST-2.1.3 
                 Details of each selected test case should be displayed in 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 lower right panel. 
               
               
                 TEST-2.1.4 
                 Test cases marked as “failed” should trigger a prompt 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 for entering a defect. Defects created in this manner 
               
               
                   
                 will be automatically linked to the appropriate test case. 
               
               
                 TEST-2.2 
                 Defects can be entered directly from the main 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 menu/navigation panel or can be entered when a test 
               
               
                   
                 case has been marked as failed. If a defect is entered in 
               
               
                   
                 connection with a test case the defect. 
               
               
                 TEST-2.3 
                 Installation tools and recovery images can be 
                 Same as requirement DEV-2.2 since these 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 downloaded from ePic manually by UI. 
                 items will be defined as engineering parts in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ePic. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.11.3 Business Rules 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 TEST-3.1 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.11.4 Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 TEST-4.1 
                 VELSUN Interface. Used to escalate defects to global 
                 Satisfies US sustaining requirements. 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 sustaining group. 
               
               
                 TEST-4.2 
                 VALSUN Interface. Used to push defects into software 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 development defect database used in VBD/SDNA 
               
               
                 TEST-4.4 
                 Tools interface. Tools will provide functions for 
                 Assumption is that testers will perform all test 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 selecting test BOMs and SKU BOMs to be provided to 
                 case/defect updating and test BOM 
               
               
                   
                 installation tools. 
                 preparation via ePic UI. 
               
               
                 TEST-4.4.1 
                 Data to be exported: 
                 These requirements can be merged with build 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 Active Series Master 
                 tool requirements since the same tools 
               
               
                   
                 LangRegion Master 
                 platform will be used to interface to ePic. 
               
               
                   
                 Test BOMs 
               
               
                   
                 SKU BOMs 
               
               
                   
                 All DB Hero Data for Component Selector 
               
               
                 TEST-4.4.2 
                 Functions to be provided: 
                 Some functions defined in requirements INT- 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 Authenticate. 
                 4.5 and INT-4.6 will be used and are 
               
               
                   
                 Get Active Series. 
                 duplicated here. 
               
               
                   
                 Get open defects for engineering part (used during 
                 Test BOMs contain software release ID&#39;s and 
               
               
                   
                 release check-in). 
                 thus don&#39;t require an installation data file. 
               
               
                   
                 Update defect status and resolution (used during 
                 SKU BOMs are DB Hero component lists and 
               
               
                   
                 release check-in). 
                 will require an Installation Data File. 
               
               
                   
                 Get Test Strategy for series/part. 
               
               
                   
                 Get Test BOMs for test strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 Get SKU BOMs for test strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 Get Installation Data File for series. 
               
               
                   
                 Get Binary Data for SW Release ID (from file 
               
               
                   
                 store). 
               
               
                   
                 Functions to allow the component selector function 
               
               
                   
                 to be used remotely with tools to create and save 
               
               
                   
                 SKU BOMs. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.11.5 Definitions 
     9.11.5.1 Test Case Types 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Basic 
                   
               
               
                 Ad-hoc 
               
               
                 Use Case 
                 Describes a regular user scenario. 
               
               
                 Compatibility 
                 List of steps to test compatibility with external 
               
               
                   
                 devices (e.g., printer or camera). 
               
               
                 FIV (Final 
               
               
                 Image Validation) 
               
               
                 Benchmarks 
                 Performance parameters captured as key/value pairs. 
               
               
                 MDA (Microsoft 
                 Performance parameters dictated by Microsoft 
               
               
                 Development 
                 captured as key/value pairs. 
               
               
                 Agreement) 
               
               
                 Screen Shot Capture 
                 Special test case consisting of just an image, which 
               
               
                   
                 is included on the RTM report. 
               
               
                 Business Unit 
               
               
                 Accessory 
               
               
                 Other 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.11.6 Screen Shot Mock-ups 
       FIGS. 12-17  show various non-limiting screen shots for defect submission, defect update, test case submit form, defect view, test results, and test case update, respectively. 
     Reporting and Notification 
     9.12.1 General Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 RPTREQ-1 
                 System must provide a custom reporting engine which 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 will allow custom SQL to be stored and run. 
               
               
                 RPTREQ-2 
                 Reports can be viewed on screen or downloaded in the 
                 XML is not required for software integration 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 following file formats: 
                 and factory deployment reports, because the 
               
               
                   
                 Adobe Acrobat (PDF) 
                 installation data file contains all required 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft Excel 
                 information in a single XML file. 
               
               
                   
                 Comma Separated Values (CSV) 
                 MS Word format is required for the RTM 
               
               
                   
                 XML (Test/Defect Reports only except for RTM) 
                 report. If Word format files cannot be 
               
               
                   
                 Microsoft Word (RTM Report Only) 
                 generated then a format that can be imported 
               
               
                   
                   
                 into MS word is acceptable as a substitute. 
               
               
                 RPTREQ-3 
                 Some complex reports are configurable by the user. 
                 Details are specified in report descriptions. 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 Which data sets to be included and criteria for the 
               
               
                   
                 report data can be specified before the report is 
               
               
                   
                 generated. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.12.2 Reports 
     The following predefined reports must be provided by ePic. Samples can be found in the appendix (chapter 13.3) 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Report Name 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 RPT-1 
                 Series Report 
                 Report of all relevant information for a given Series 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (SW BOM and Metadata). 
               
               
                 RPT-2 
                 Series BOM 
                 Report of all relevant SW BOM information for a 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Report 
                 given Series. 
               
               
                 RPT-3 
                 Series Metadata 
                 Report of all relevant metadata for a given Series. 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Report 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ID was skipped (it is retained to avoid confusion). 
               
               
                 RPT-5 
                 BOM Report 
                 Report of all relevant information for a given Part, 
                 Has Optional Data Choices: parts, 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Group or Release which has a BOM. 
                 dependencies, parents, children, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 releases. 
               
               
                 RPT-6 
                 Module Release 
                 Report of all relevant information for a given Module 
                 Has Optional Data Choices: parts, 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Report 
                 Release including BOM and Metadata. 
                 dependencies, parents, children, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 releases. 
               
               
                 RPT-7 
                 Group Report 
                 Report of all Parts and Releases in a given group. 
                 Has Optional Data Choices: parts, 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 dependencies, parents, children, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 releases. 
               
               
                 RPT-8 
                 Image BOM 
                 Report of all Parts and Releases in a given Image 
                 Has Optional Data Choices: parts, 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Report 
                 BOM. 
                 dependencies, parents, children, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 releases. 
               
               
                 RPT-9 
                 BOM Freeze 
                 Report of all relevant information for a given Series 
                 Previous report is an optional drop 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Report 
                 BOM - which includes a report of new items, updated 
                 down menu of ALL available 
               
               
                   
                   
                 items, missing items, removed items (from previous 
                 Series BOM Snapshot revisions 
               
               
                   
                   
                 report). 
                 (this means you could compare 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 two different Series). The user 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 would be required to select a 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BOM Snapshot to do the report for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 and then a BOM Snapshot to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 compare it to. If no comparison 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BOM Snapshot is provided it 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 simply creates the report. 
               
               
                 RPT-10 
                 Media Set 
                 Report of all Components, Parts and Releases used in a 
                 Factory Media Report would 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Report 
                 given factory or recovery media set. 
                 include Metadata for Factory. 
               
               
                 RPT-11 
                 Part Report 
                 Report of all relevant information for a given Part. 
                 Has Optional Data Choices: part 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 releases, dependencies, parents, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 children. 
               
               
                 RPT-12 
                 Part Release 
                 List of all Releases by major part with basic attribute 
                 Has Optional Data Choices: 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Report 
                 information. 
                 dependencies, parents, children. 
               
               
                 RPT-13 
                 Part Release 
                 Report of all relevant information for a given Part 
                 Has Optional Data Choices: 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Version Report 
                 Release Version. 
                 dependencies, parents, children. 
               
               
                 RPT-14 
                 RTM Report 
                 This is a multi-part report containing test system 
                 Test/Defect report. 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                   
                 information, detailed SW BOM information, defects, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 test cases/results, and other items. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 User must select a Series/LangRegion and one or more 
               
               
                   
                   
                 OSs from the report. User must also select which sub- 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reports to include. The system will then extract all 
               
               
                   
                   
                 required information from the relevant test strategy and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BOMs and format it. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The report must be output in MS Word (or compatible 
               
               
                   
                   
                 format) since it must be edited further after being 
               
               
                   
                   
                 generated from ePic. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 See sample in appendix (13.3.14) for more details. 
               
               
                 RPT-15 
                 Test Status for 
                 This Report should list ‘Unresolved Defects’ and ‘Test 
                 Test/Defect report. 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Series 
                 Cases’ that needs to be executed for a particular Series. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 User can specify where test cases, defects or both are 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to be included in the report. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Unresolved Defects: Defects with ‘Defect Status’ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 equal to Open and ‘Defect Resolution’ not equal to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ‘Fixed’, ‘Deferred’, ‘Will not Fix’, ‘Duplicate.’ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Defect Attributes to include in the report: Defect ID, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Part, Summary, Severity, Exposure, Defect Resolution 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (sorted by Priority). 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Test Cases that need to be executed: List of test cases 
               
               
                   
                   
                 with ‘Test Results’ equal to ‘Not Tested’ or ‘Impeded.’ 
               
               
                 RPT-16 
                 Test Status for 
                 Same as above for all active series. Sorted by Series. 
                 Test/Defect report. 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 all Active Series 
               
               
                 RPT-17 
                 Defect report 
                 Displays all available attributes for a defect. User can 
                 Test/Defect report. 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 for Individual 
                 optionally request that defect history be included in the 
               
               
                   
                 Defect 
                 report. 
               
               
                 RPT-18 
                 Defects by user, 
                 This is a configurable report for Defect analysis. It is 
                 Test/Defect report. 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 team, series, 
                 intended to be a way to export defect data for analysis 
               
               
                   
                 cycle, etc. 
                 into external tools or for importing to other systems. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Filtering fields for Defect: Defect ID, Defect Status, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Defect Resolution, Responsible persons, Priority, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Severity, Exposure, Champion, Defect Submitter, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Submit Date, Close Date, Frequency, Assigned to, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Microsoft Defect ID, Beta ID, Sustaining Status, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Sustaining Priority, Days Open (less than or equal to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 given number), Series, Part. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 System will include all available defect attributes in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 one table/data structure. 
               
               
                 RPT-19 
                 Test Case 
                 This report is similar to RTP-18 except it is for test 
                 Test/Defect report. 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Report 
                 cases. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Filtering fields for Test Case: Test Case ID, Test Case 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Type, Test Results, Part, Series, Test Area, Status, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Level, Submitter, Last Updated, Excluded Series, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Submit Date, Linked Defects (to a particular test case). 
               
               
                   
                   
                 System will include all available test case attributes in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 one table/data structure. 
               
               
                 RPT-20 
                 Test Strategy 
                 Listing of test cases on a test strategy. User can 
                 Test/Defect report. PQD would 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Report 
                 optionally request a view. 
                 like this report to function 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 similarly to the view on 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 http://platform.itd.sel.sony.com/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (click on “test cases” on menu). 
               
               
                 RPT-21 
                 Test Strategy 
                 A view of a test strategies by active series which 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Status Report 
                 displays the percentage of test cases completed. 
               
               
                 RPT-22 
                 End-of-cycle 
                 This report contains summary information on various 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 Defect Report 
                 defects for one or more series and/or time periods. It 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is to be used as a post-cycle analysis tool. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 User can select one or more Series/LangRegions. User 
               
               
                   
                   
                 can also select one or more cycles or date ranges (for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 product cycle, initial product cycle attribute of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 series would be used). User can also select which sub- 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reports to include. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Data is exportable as PDF or excel files (it is okay if 
               
               
                   
                   
                 more than one excel file is generated). 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The sub-reports are as follows: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Defect Priority 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Defect Severity 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Defect Exposure 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Defect Resolution by Application Champion 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Defect Resolution by Module (recursive for FI 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BOM) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Top Ten Deferred/Will Not Fix Defects. 
               
               
                 RPT-23 
                 Build Count 
                 Table of Series, OS, FI build count, and Recovery 
                 Test/Defect report. Used for end- 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 media build count. 
                 of-cycle accounting. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 User must select cycle, date range, or all active series. 
               
               
                 RPT-24 
                 FI Test Case 
                 Test Case results for a cycle or date range by FI 
                 Test/Defect report. 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Report 
                 release. 
               
               
                 RPT-25 
                 Module Test 
                 Test Case results for a cycle by Series SW BOM 
                 Test/Defect report. 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Case Report 
                 snapshot (test strategy). 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.12.3 Notification 
     9.12.3.1 General Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 NOTE-1 
                 Email notifications will not be tied to 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 roles, but functions for adding sets of 
               
               
                   
                 email addresses to a notification list by 
               
               
                   
                 system role or group should be 
               
               
                   
                 available. Any email address can be 
               
               
                   
                 added to a notification list (not just 
               
               
                   
                 system users). 
               
               
                 NOTE-2 
                 When a new user is assigned a role in 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 ePic system should present a list of 
               
               
                   
                 events to the administrator for which 
               
               
                   
                 notification is available. User will be 
               
               
                   
                 added to the list for any events selected. 
               
               
                 NOTE-3 
                 All notification lists can be edited 
                   
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 manually in the system. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.12.3.2 Events 
     The following events will trigger email notification to users. On screen notifications are indicated elsewhere in this document. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Reference 
                 Comment 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 EVENT-1 
                 Email notification is issued when a release check-in is 
                 DEV-1.2.8 
                   
               
               
                   
                 completed (files have been uploaded to file store). 
               
               
                 EVENT-1.1 
                 Email notification lists should be stored for each 
                   
                 This requirement will satisfy the 
               
               
                   
                 Engineering Part Type (editable via admin screen). 
                   
                 need to monitor image builds 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (Pilot, RC, GM events). 
               
               
                 EVENT-2 
                 RTM email notification requirements. RTM emails 
                 MFG-1.2.2, 
               
               
                   
                 should be sent when “Test RTMs,” “RTMs,” and 
                 MFG-1.3.2 
               
               
                   
                 “running change RTMs” are issued in the system. 
               
               
                 EVENT-2.1 
                 Email lists should be maintained by series. 
               
               
                 EVENT-2.2 
                 Emails should clearly indicate which event for which the 
               
               
                   
                 email is being sent. 
               
               
                 EVENT-2.3 
                 Each email notification should contain a unique identifier 
               
               
                   
                 in the subject line and body of the message that can be 
               
               
                   
                 used to refer to the message. RTM email notifications 
               
               
                   
                 should be logged in a history log that can be viewed via 
               
               
                   
                 ePic UI. 
               
               
                 EVENT-2.4 
                 Email content should also be attached as a PDF 
               
               
                   
                 document to the email message (to be used as official 
               
               
                   
                 documentation). 
               
               
                 EVENT-3 
                 Series SW BOM snapshot created. Changes since the 
                   
                 Notification of changes to the 
               
               
                   
                 last snapshot (per MFG-1.3.2) should be included in the 
                   
                 Series SW BOM (module/image 
               
               
                   
                 notification. 
                   
                 insertions). 
               
               
                 EVENT-3.1 
                 Email lists are maintained by Series. 
               
               
                 EVENT-4 
                 Series Software BOM snapshot flagged as release 
                   
                 This is a “BOM Freeze”. 
               
               
                   
                 candidate. 
               
               
                 EVENT-4.1 
                 Email lists are maintained by Series. 
               
               
                 EVENT-5 
                 Defect submission or defect status/resolution change. 
               
               
                   
                 Defect monitoring is performed by engineering part. 
               
               
                   
                 Users can also choose to receive all. 
               
               
                 EVENT-5.1 
                 Application champion and any users on the owner list for 
                   
                 If a user wants to monitor a 
               
               
                   
                 the affected engineering part should be automatically 
                   
                 specific part they must be added 
               
               
                   
                 added to the notification list. Any owners of a test case 
                   
                 to the owner list. 
               
               
                   
                 associated with the part must also 
               
               
                   
                 be notified. 
               
               
                 EVENT-5.2 
                 Users can also subscribe to receive defects events by 
               
               
                   
                 Series and/or LangRegion. 
               
               
                 EVENT-6 
                 New series loaded in ePic from DB Hero. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.13 Administration 
     9.13.1 Usage Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 ADM-1.1 
                 Add/edit user. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 ADM-1.1.1 
                 User is required to be associated with an engineering 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 organization. 
               
               
                 ADM-1.1.2 
                 User can be assigned one or more roles. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 ADM-1.1.3 
                 Users email address must be stored by system. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 ADM-1.2 
                 Add/edit engineering organization. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 ADM-1.2.1 
                 Engineering organizations can be Sony or 3 rd  party. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 ADM-1.3 
                 Manage 3 rd  party data access. 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                 ADM-1.3.1 
                 One or more series can be assigned to a 3 rd  party 
                   
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 organization. The 3 rd  party organization users will only 
               
               
                   
                 be able to see/download data concerning the series&#39; 
               
               
                   
                 which have been assigned to them. 
               
               
                 ADM-1.4 
                 Add/edit LangRegion&#39;s. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 ADM-1.4.1 
                 User can add/remove LangRegions to/from the master. 
                   
                 1 
               
               
                 ADM-1.4.2 
                 DB Hero SPECS are mapped to corresponding 
                 This requirement can be dropped if 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 LangRegions defined in the system. 
                 LangRegion relationship to DB Hero SPECS 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and COMPONENTS can be identified 
               
               
                   
                   
                 programmatically. 
               
               
                 ADM-1.5 
                 System will provide functionality to make batch 
                 This is an admin function only. Users must 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 changes to attributes entities. User can search for 
                 change items one by one. 
               
               
                   
                 entities, select groups of items to change, and change 
               
               
                   
                 one or more attributes for all items in the group. 
               
               
                 ADM-1.6 
                 System should provide a function for defining teams of 
                 Some test/defect functions call for assignment 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 users. 
                 to a team. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The group management functionality 
               
               
                   
                   
                 implemented in ePic prototypes may satisfy 
               
               
                   
                   
                 this requirement. 
               
               
                 ADM-1.7 
                 Admin functions for defining values for Test Area 
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 (10.4.9, TST-006) and Status (10.4.9, TST-013) should 
               
               
                   
                 be available. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.13.2 User Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 ADM-2.1 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.13.3 Business Rules 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 ADM-3.1 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.13.4 Interface Requirements 
       
                                                     ID   Description   Comments   Priority                          ADM-4.1                                    
9.14 ePic Interface Library
 
This section describes requirements for the ePic database interface library API for Build Tools and Test System Preparation Tools. Some interface requirements and tools requirements in other sections of this document are satisfied in whole or in part by this API.
 
VOA tools covered are Magellan and Modular Image Network Download System (MINDS).
 
All VOA build tools use ePic data, but most of the tools use flat files created by Magellan, as the source of data. Build tools also check in software releases and images and thus need to be able to write data to the ePic database and upload files to the file store.
 
VOA test system preparation is performed using MINDS tools. These tools are provided on a WinPE CD. This toolset will be made available to ePic users.
 
SDNA will use VOA provided build tools.
 
9.14.1 ePic Database Interface Requirements
 
The ePic database interface should provide the following functions. When a “Recordset” is specified as return value, all applicable attributes for the entity should be included in the Recordset.
 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Function 
                 Parameters 
                 Return value 
                 Comments 
                 Used By 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 DLL-1 
                 Authenticate 
                 User 
                 UserID 
                 Authenticate user. The 
                 Magellan, 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Password 
                 SecurityToken 
                 security token should be 
                 MINDS 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Action (optional) 
                   
                 passed on to all other 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 functions. All other 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 functions can then check 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 for a valid security token 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 before getting data. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-2 
                 GetImageBOMData 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BOM Snapshot ID 
                   
                 return all items on the 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 isBasePlus (optional) 
                   
                 specific Image BOM 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 isOPK (optional) 
                   
                 that meet the criteria 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 isRecoverable (optional) 
                   
                 set by the optional 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 arguments. If an 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 optional argument is not 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 passed to the function, 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 that criteria should be 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ignored 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-3 
                 GetModulesEPCs 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Series ID 
                   
                 return all modules and 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion 
                   
                 EPCs for the specified 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 isPermanent (optional) 
                   
                 Series/LangRegion. If 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Permanent argument is 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 True, return all permanent 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 items. If it is False, return 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 all temporary items. If it is 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 not specified return all 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 items. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-4 
                 GetSeries 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan, 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 return all active series. 
                 MINDS 
                   
               
               
                 DLL-5 
                 GetLangRegions 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan, 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 return all available 
                 MINDS 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 LangRegion values. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-6 
                 GetBOMList 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan, 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Series ID 
                   
                 return a list of available 
                 MINDS 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion 
                   
                 Image BOM 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 isImageBOM (optional) 
                   
                 Snapshots/Module BOM 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 isModuleBOM (optional) 
                   
                 Snapshots/All BOM 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Snapshots (depending on 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 optional arguments) for 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 given Series/LangRegion. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-7 
                 GetBOM 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan, 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BOM Snapshot ID 
                   
                 return the BOM contents 
                 MINDS 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (parts release list) for 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 selected BOM Snapshot 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ID. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-8 
                 UploadFiles 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Boolean 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan, 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Part Release ID 
                   
                 upload Part Release files 
                 MINDS 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Files to be uploaded. 
                   
                 to the ePic file store. One 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 function call should 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 upload all the required 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 files. We do not want to 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 call this function for 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 each file. This function 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 must be called after 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 CheckInPart Release. It 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 may be called minutes or 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 hours after 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 CheckInPartReleasefor 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 modules (because 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 modules require release 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ID to be embedded in the 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 module). 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-9 
                 CheckInPartRelease 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Part Release ID 
                 This function should add 
                 Magellan 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 All Part Release data for 
                   
                 a new Part Release to the 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 this Part Type. 
                   
                 ePic database. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-10 
                 UpdatePartRelease 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Boolean 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Part Release ID. 
                   
                 update Part Release 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 All other Part Release 
                   
                 record. This function is 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 data for this Part Type. 
                   
                 required as some part 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 releases may be created 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 using ePic and then 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 updated from Magellan 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-11 
                 GetSeriesForPart 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Part ID 
                   
                 return a list of Series that 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 have this Part on their 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 BOM Templates. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-12 
                 AddPartReleaseToSeries 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Boolean 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Part Release ID 
                   
                 assign the specified Part 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Series IDs 
                   
                 Release to one or more 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Series. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-13 
                 GetDefectsForPart 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should 
                 Magellan 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Part ID 
                   
                 return a list of defects that 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Status (optional) 
                   
                 are currently assigned to 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 this Part. Optionally result 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 set can be filtered by 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 defect status. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-14 
                 UpdateDefects 
                 SecurityToken 
                   
                 This function should 
                 Magellan 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Part Release ID 
                   
                 update the defect status of 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Defect IDs 
                   
                 specified defects. This 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 New Defect Statuses 
                   
                 allows the user to specify 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 New Defect Resolutions 
                   
                 what defects have been 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 New Defect Notes 
                   
                 fixed in this Release 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-15 
                 GetReleaseEmailContents 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Text 
                 Get the email text. This is 
                 Magellan 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Part Release ID 
                   
                 used to display the email 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 notification to the user 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 before it is actually sent 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 out. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Emails sent from 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Magellan will provide 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 information on PAC Files, 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 FI image, AppInfo and 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 DataFile contents. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-16 
                 SendMail 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Boolean 
                 Send email notification. 
                 Magellan 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Part Release ID 
                   
                 The contents of the email 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 CCText 
                   
                 will be generated 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 automatically like part 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 releases checked in from 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ePic. Emails sent from 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Magellan will have a 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 different target recipient 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 list. User should be able 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 to add additional 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 recipients. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-17 
                 LaunchComponentsSelector 
                 SecurityToken 
                 String/Recordset 
                 Launch Component 
                 MINDS 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Series ID 
                   
                 Selector to allow user 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion is FreeStyle. 
                   
                 to select a configuration, 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 check for validity and 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 returns valid selection of 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 parts. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 This is used to create a 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 SKU BOM in freestyle 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 mode 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-18 
                 GetSKUBOMSnapshotList 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should 
                 MINDS 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Series ID 
                   
                 return a list of avaiiable 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion 
                   
                 SKU BOM snapshots for 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 given Series/LangRegion 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-19 
                 GetSKUBOM 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should 
                 MINDS 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BOM Snapshot ID 
                   
                 return the SKU BOM 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 contents (parts list). It 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 should also return the 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 installation data file 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (either as XML or 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 location from where it can 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 be obtained). 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-20 
                 AddLog 
                 SecurityToken 
                 BOOL 
                 This function adds a 
                 MINDS 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MACAddress 
                   
                 record to the log. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 IPAddress 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 SessionID 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 User 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Action PartReleaseName 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 ReleaseID 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Size 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 StartTimestamp 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 EndTimestamp 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Time 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mode 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-21 
                 GetLog 
                 SecurityToken 
                 Recordset 
                 This function should get 
                 MINDS 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LogID (optional) 
                   
                 the specified log record. 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-22 
                 GetSystemTime 
                 SecurityToken 
                 String 
                 Get time on DB server; 
                 MINDS 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 value used in AddLog. 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (This can be implemented 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 within AddLog in which 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 case this function is not 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 required). 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DLL-23 
                 IsHDDProject 
                 SecurityToken 
                 BOOL 
                 Check if Series uses HDD 
                 MINDS 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Series 
                   
                 recovery 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.14.2 Technical Requirements 
     
         
         
           
             Database access for use in MINDS must be able to run in the stripped down version of Windows, Windows Preinstall Environment. (This generally means the code must be written in C++. It&#39;s possible to write the programs in Java, Python, Perl, etc., but this would need to be tested and set up within WinPE.) 
             The Database Interface Layer should support applications running in different environments and developed using different programming languages, as shown in the Appendix 1.3.1. 
             All functions in the epic Database Library should implement stateless security. For example, The Authenticate function should return a SecurityToken object that is then passed to other functions. These functions then check if the security token is valid before interacting with the database. Any other security mechanism can also be used. 
           
         
       
    
     9.14.3 Architecture 
     9.14.3.1 VOA Tools 
       FIG. 18  shows the non-limiting architecture of VOA Tools. 
     9.14.4 Usage Scenarios 
     9.14.4.1 MINDS Usage Scenarios 
     9.14.4.1.1 Download Image to Test System from MINDS CD.
 
 FIG. 18A  logic can be used by testers and by integrators.
 
     9.14.4.1.2 Upload Foundation Image. 
       FIG. 19  refers, which has been described above and which can be used by integrators. 
     9.15 Sustaining 
     This section describes requirements for ePic from the Global Sustaining Group. These requirements will extend existing functionality. 
     9.15.1 Usage Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 SUS-1.1 
                 Sustaining modules will be managed in ePic. 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                 SUS-1.1.1 
                 A new part type “Sustaining Module” must be added 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 to ePic. 
               
               
                 SUS-1.1.2 
                 Addition sustaining specific attributes must be 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 supported. 
               
               
                 SUS-1.1.2.1 
                 Sustaining ID (or SP-ID), separate from normal 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 Part/Release ID must be maintained by ePic and 
               
               
                   
                 returned when applicable by check-in functions. 
               
               
                   
                 (ePic will manage this sequence.) 
               
               
                 SUS-1.1.3 
                 Sustaining module release notifications will be sent 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 to a different email notification list than for other 
               
               
                   
                 modules. 
               
               
                 SUS-1.1.4 
                 Sustaining modules must have a unique identifier 
                 This is similar functionality as other ePic 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 embedded in them to support post-installation 
                 modules. 
               
               
                   
                 verification by “VAIO Update” software. 
               
               
                 SUS-1.2 
                 Sustaining users should be able to retrieve software 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 BOM information from ePic UI. 
               
               
                 SUS-1.3 
                 Support groups require a network installation system. 
                 Test System Preparation CD can be used for 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                   
                 this purpose. 
               
               
                 SUS-1.4 
                 Maintenance Desk requires Recovery Media 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 (RDVD&#39;s/Fulfillment Media). 
               
               
                 SUS-1.5 
                 Module Specification should be unified with 
                 This is so developers only need to create on 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 Sustaining Patch specification. 
                 format. 
               
               
                 SUS-1.6 
                 Software BOM views in ePic should also display any 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 applicable sustaining patches. 
               
               
                 SUS-1.7 
                 Search function should allow entry of a model name. 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                 SUS-1.8 
                 Search functions should allow Series/LangRegions to 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 which a particular sustaining patch has been applied 
               
               
                   
                 to be to be found by Sustaining Part ID (SP-ID). 
               
               
                 SUS-1.9 
                 User can use Part Name/Major Version as a search 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 key to find Series/LangRegion or list of sustaining 
               
               
                   
                 patches. 
               
               
                 SUS-1.10 
                 Legacy data must be maintained in ePic for a time 
                   
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 period suitable to sustaining. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.15.2 User Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 SUS-2.1 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.15.3 Business Rules 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 SUS-3.1 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     9.15.4 Interface Requirements 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 ID 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Priority 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
            
               
                   
                 SUS-4.1 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     10 Data Model 
     10.1 Concepts 
       FIG. 20  shows the overall, non-limiting system architecture for Sony PC production. The figure gives an overview for an ePic related systems diagram. 
     10.2 Data Structure 
     Moving to  FIG. 21 , the data structure and flow chart of ePic are shown. 
     10.3 Database Entities 
       FIG. 22  illustrates a non-limiting ePic database entities diagram. 
     10.4 Attributes 
     10.4.1 Series 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Intended Usage 
                 Examples 
                 Required 
                 Modifiable 
                 Basic Search 
                 Ext. Search 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 SER-001 
                 Series ID 
                 Auto-generated system identifier. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 SER-002 
                 Series Name 
                 IRX or ATX number. 
                   
                   
                 IRX-3150, ATX-2230 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 SER-003 
                 Code Name 
                 Textual code name for the series. 
                   
                   
                 Diablo EPD 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 SER-004 
                 Marketing Name 
                 There will be many (region 
                 May be mapped to a 
                 Selection criteria in 
                 VGN-S270, VGN- 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to region, cycle to cycle). 
                 series SW BOM and 
                 system screens reporting. 
                 S27, VGN-S270A, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For Example: PCV-RS500 
                 one or more LangRegions. 
                   
                 VGC-RB30, VGC-RB30C 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Functionality depends 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 on DB Hero handling of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Marketing Model name. 
               
               
                 SER-005 
                 On Sales Date 
                 One date for each 
                 Maintained 
                 Reporting. 
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion. 
                 independently in ePic. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 May be useful for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 satisfying sustaining 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 requirements. 
               
               
                 SER-006 
                 Off Sales Date 
                 One date for each 
                 Maintained 
                 Reporting. 
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion. 
                 independently in ePic. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 May be useful for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 satisfying sustaining 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 requirements. 
               
               
                 SER-007 
                 End of Life 
                 Yes/No. Defaults to no. 
                 Maintained 
                 Reporting. 
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 independently in ePic. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 May be useful for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 satisfying sustaining 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 requirements. 
               
               
                 SER-008 
                 Status 
                 Planning, active, archive, 
                 Maintained 
                 Reporting. 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 obsolete, sustaining. 
                 independently in ePic. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
                 (req) 
               
               
                 SER-009 
                 Comments 
                 Long description of a 
                 Maintained 
                 Reporting. 
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 series. 
                 independently in ePic. 
               
               
                 SER-010 
                 Created By 
                   
                 Series should not be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 created manually - only 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 imported from DB 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Hero. DB Hero 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “created by” is not 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 necessary here. 
               
               
                 SER-011 
                 Created Date 
               
               
                 SER-012 
                 Active 
                 Yes/No 
                 Maintained 
                 Control display and 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 independently in ePic. 
                 default series lists. 
               
               
                 SER-013 
                 Planning 
                 List of planning cycles 
                   
                 Reporting. 
                 2005 Q3, 2005 Q4, 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 Cycle/Season 
                 applicable for this series. 
                   
                   
                 2006 Q1 
               
               
                 SER-014 
                 Change Log 
                 History, system 
                 Maintained 
               
               
                   
                   
                 generated/maintained 
                 independently in ePic. 
               
               
                 SER-015 
                 Production Site 
                 List of production sites for 
                 Maintained 
                 May be used for 
                 NFCH, UCCH, 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 this series. 
                 independently in ePic. 
                 RTM and test-RTM 
                 DPCH, IT-M, SNT 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 release status by 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 production site to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 facilitate file store 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 functionality and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 reporting. 
               
               
                 SER-016 
                 LangRegions 
                 List of LangRegions to be 
                 Maintained 
                 Used to filter the list 
                 en_US, en_UK, 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 Supported 
                 supported by this engineering 
                 independently in ePic. 
                 of LangRegions on 
                 jp_JP, etc. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 part. 
                   
                 screens and for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 reporting. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     10.4.2 Components 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Intended 
                   
                   
                   
                 Basic 
                 Ext. 
               
               
                 ID 
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Usage 
                 Examples 
                 Required 
                 Modifiable 
                 Search 
                 Search 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 COM-001 
                 Component ID 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 COM-002 
                 Component Name 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 COM-003 
                 Active 
                 Yes/No 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Components are 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 unique per series so 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 this is really a series 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 attribute. 
               
               
                 COM-005 
                 Type 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Components are 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 system generated in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 DB Hero. There is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 no comments field. 
               
               
                 COM-007 
                 Child Parts 
                 List 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 COM-008 
                 List of Specs 
                 Spec-to-Component 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 relationship may be needed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 for ePic functionality. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     10.4.3 Planning (DB Hero) Parts 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Intended 
                   
                   
                   
                 Basic 
                 Ext. 
               
               
                 ID 
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Usage 
                 Examples 
                 Required 
                 Modifiable 
                 Search 
                 Search 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 PP-001 
                 Part Name 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 PP-002 
                 Part ID 
                 DB Hero Part 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Number (not 
               
               
                   
                   
                 vendor part 
               
               
                   
                   
                 number). 
               
               
                 PP-003 
                 Active 
                 Yes/No 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                 PP-004 
                 SW/HW 
                 Flag 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 PP-005 
                 Major Version 
                   
                 Assumption is that it 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 will be separated 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 from description in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 DR Hero fro SW 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 items. 
               
               
                 PP-006 
                 Vendor 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     10.4.4 Engineering Parts 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Intended Usage 
                 Examples 
                 Required 
                 Modifiable 
                 Basic Search 
                 Ext. Search 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 EP-001 
                 Part Name 
                 This is only application 
                   
                 Can be added to a 
                 Adobe Premiere, 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 name with no version information. 
                   
                 group. 
                 Sonic Stage Studio, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Radeon 7500 Driver 
               
               
                 EP-002 
                 Parent Planning Part 
                   
                 Relation 
                 Used to facilitate 
                 Index to DB Hero 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Series SW BOM 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 creation. 
               
               
                 EP-003 
                 Active 
                 Yes/No 
                   
                 Used to control 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 display of parts to 
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 users. Only active 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 parts should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 shown in most 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 screens. Inactive 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 part releases can be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 archived from file 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 store. 
               
               
                 EP-004 
                 Major Version 
                 Major version number 
                 New major 
                 Can be added to a 
                 1.1, 2.4, 6.0, 7.0, 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (For Example: 1.1, 1.2, 
                 versions are 
                 group. 
                 4.2.00.06070(Not 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1.3). 
                 created when 
                   
                 for LA) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 specifications 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 change - not 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 when defects 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 are fixed or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 minor changes 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 are made. 
               
               
                 EP-005 
                 Part Type 
                 Image, OS Setup, 
                 See below. 
                   
                 Lookup List 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Installable Application, 
                   
                   
                 including: Image, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Internal Tools, 
                   
                   
                 OS Setup, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BIOS/Firmware, Media 
                   
                   
                 Installable 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Set, Other 
                   
                   
                 Application, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Internal Tools, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 BIOS/Firmware, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Media Set, Other 
               
               
                 EP-006 
                 Part Sub Type 
                 Image (Foundation, P1, 
                 See below. 
                   
                 Lookup List 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Monolithic Image)/ 
                   
                   
                 including: Image 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Installable Application 
                   
                   
                 (Foundation, P1, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (Application, Driver, 
                   
                   
                 Monolithic Image)/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Online Documents, OS 
                   
                   
                 Installable 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Add-on, Module)/Media 
                   
                   
                 Application 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Set (Recovery, Factory) 
                   
                   
                 (Application, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Driver, Online Documents, OS 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Add-on, Module)/Media Set 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (Recovery, Factory) 
               
               
                 EP-007 
                 Dependency Append 
                 Textual description of a 
                   
                 Information for 
                 Text field: IE can 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 dependency that is not 
                   
                 builders. 
                 only be installed on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 enforced by the system. 
                   
                   
                 Tuesday. 
               
               
                 EP-008 
                 Dependency 
                 List of parts with “Don&#39;t 
                   
                 Used to 
                 Relation to another 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 care,” “Need,” or 
                   
                 validate/complete 
                 engineering part 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Exclude” specified for 
                   
                 release lists for 
                 index. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 each part. System can 
                   
                 testers and during 
               
               
                   
                   
                 enforce/interpret these 
                   
                 BOM creation. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 dependencies. 
               
               
                 EP-009 
                 Install Order 
                 List of parts with “Don&#39;t 
                   
                 Used by installation 
                 Relation to another 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 care,” “Before,” or 
                   
                 tools to control 
                 engineering part 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “After” specified for each 
                   
                 order of release 
                 index. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 part. 
                   
                 install. 
               
               
                 EP-010 
                 Customer Label 
                 Used in Single 
                   
                 Displayed to 
                 Adobe Premiere 
                 Y (for 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Application Recovery. 
                   
                 customer during 
                 Standard for 
                 recoverable 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Text for each 
                   
                 application 
                 Windows XP 
                 applications 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion. 
                   
                 recovery. 
                 English, nVidia 
                 only) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Graphics Driver, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 DVGate 2.0 
               
               
                 EP-011 
                 Customer Desc 
                 Marketing Desc/Hover 
                   
                 Displayed to 
                 Instant Video 
                 Y (for 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 text used in Single 
                   
                 customer during 
                 Everywhere: Sign 
                 recoverable 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Application Recovery. 
                   
                 application 
                 up for IP Video 
                 applications 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Text for each 
                   
                 recovery. 
                 Conferencing. 
                 only) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion. 
               
               
                 EP-012 
                 BLID 
                 Used for Foundation 
                 Assigned 
                 Used during 
                 UCV156PEUM 
                 Y (for FI 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Image sub type only. 
                 manually 
                 installation of 
                   
                 only) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BLID = BIOS Lock ID. 
                 currently. 
                 releases. Stored in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Uniquely 
                 DMI. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 identifies 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 foundation 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 image in VOA. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 One FI can 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 have multiple 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BLIDs in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 VBD/VOE. 
               
               
                 EP-013 
                 Is Default 
                 Yes/no (default for each 
                 Actual 
                 Creating Snapshots 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Part Name, Major 
                 implementation 
                 of BOM Templates 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Version, Release, 
                 per the data 
                 (Groups). 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion 
                 model provided 
               
               
                   
                   
                 combination). Defaults 
                 by Neusoft. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to false. 
               
               
                 EP-014 
                 Champion 
                 Person responsible for 
                   
                   
                 Relation to a user 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 testing info. One or more 
                   
                   
                 index. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 persons can be listed. 
               
               
                 EP-015 
                 Owner 
                 Contact 
                   
                   
                 Relation to a user 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Persons/Developer. One 
                   
                   
                 index 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or more persons can be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 listed. 
               
               
                 EP-016 
                 Localized By 
                 Eng. Organization which 
                   
                 For information 
                 text field: VOE, 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 localized the part. 
                   
                 only. Not used by 
                 SDNA, VOA, STC, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Manually maintained. 
                   
                 system. 
                 VBD 
               
               
                 EP-017 
                 Target Series 
                 List that describes BOM 
                   
                   
                 IRX-3440, IRX- 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 template(this part needs 
                   
                   
                 3760, ATX-7100 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to go on these series). 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Specified by developers, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 integrators. Used to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 generate series s/w bom. 
               
               
                 EP-018 
                 Series Dependency 
                 Text description for 
                   
                 For information 
                 Text description for 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 information, if any. 
                   
                 only. May be used 
                 information, if any. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 by builders/testers. 
               
               
                 EP-019 
                 Supported LangRegions 
                 List of LangRegions to be 
                   
                 Unsupported 
                 Relatuion to 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 supported by this part. 
                   
                 LangRegions should 
                 Language Region 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 not be shown to 
                 indexes: ENU-US, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 users in other 
                 ENU-UK, SPA-LA, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 screens/functions. 
                 etc. 
               
               
                 EP-020 
                 Localized Variation 
                 Yes/No - enables 
                   
                 UI control. 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 functionality for defining 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Planned Localized 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Variations. 
               
               
                 EP-021 
                 Planned Localized 
                 A named group of 
                   
                 Alternate way to 
                 Look up table to 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 Variation 
                 LangRegions. The name 
                   
                 select multiple 
                 LangRegionGroups 
               
               
                   
                   
                 of variation is manually 
                   
                 LangRegions for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 specified and can be 
                   
                 screen functions. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 anything. For example: 
                   
                 Releases are 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “EN-NTSC” -&gt; en_US, 
                   
                 associate with 
               
               
                   
                   
                 en_UK; “EN-PAL”-&gt; 
                   
                 LangRegions and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 en_DE 
                   
                 not Planned Release 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Variations. 
               
               
                 EP-022 
                 Change Log 
                 History, system 
                 All changes 
                   
                 History, system 
               
               
                   
                   
                 generated/maintained. 
                 should be 
                   
                 generated/maintained. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 logged with 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 who and when. 
               
               
                 EP-023 
                 OS 
                 XPP, XPH, MCE, 
                   
                   
                 XPP, XPH, MCE, 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 WinPE, etc. Only used 
                   
                   
                 WinPE, etc. Only 
               
               
                   
                   
                 when Part Type is Image. 
                   
                   
                 used when Part 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Type is Image. 
               
               
                 EP-024 
                 EPC/Module/X- 
                 For Module sub-types 
                 Used in VSMS 
                 Used by builders 
                 Look up table: 
                 Y (for 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 Module 
                 only. Select one of these 
                 (VOA) to 
                 and installation 
                 EPC/Module/X- 
                 modules 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (mutually exclusive). 
                 describe a 
                 tools. 
                 Module. 
                 only) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 EPC = Engineering 
                 Module. May 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Process Change. 
                 change pending 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 installation 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 tool/recovery 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 specification 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 definition. 
               
               
                 EP-025 
                 Is Temporary 
                 Specifies the part must be 
                 Inverse of VOA 
                 Used by installation 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 deleted from recovery 
                 “Is Permanent” 
                 tools. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 partition after installation 
                 attribute. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 in the factory. Defaults to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 false. 
               
               
                 EP-026 
                 SpecificationFreezeSched 
                 One date for each 
                   
                 For information 
                 Date field per 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Planned Localized 
                   
                 only. In the future, 
                 LangRegionGroup 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Variation. 
                   
                 will be used to 
                 specified above. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 trigger email 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 notifications. 
               
               
                 EP-027 
                 GUIFreezeSched 
                 One date for each 
                   
                 For information 
                 Date field per 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Planned Localized 
                   
                 only. In the future, 
                 LangRegionGroup 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Variation. 
                   
                 will be used to 
                 specified above. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 trigger email 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 notifications. 
               
               
                 EP-028 
                 FeatureFreezeSched 
                 One date for each 
                   
                 For information 
                 Date field per 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Planned Localized 
                   
                 only. In the future, 
                 LangRegionGroup 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Variation. 
                   
                 will be used to 
                 specified above. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 trigger email 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 notifications. 
               
               
                 EP-029 
                 RCRelaseSchedule 
                 One date for each 
                   
                 For information 
                 Date field per 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Planned Localized 
                   
                 only. In the future, 
                 LangRegionGroup 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Variation. 
                   
                 will be used to 
                 specified above. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 trigger email 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 notifications. 
               
               
                 EP-030 
                 GMReleaseSched 
                 One date for each 
                   
                 For information 
                 Date field per 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Planned Localized 
                   
                 only. In the future, 
                 LangRegionGroup 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Variation. 
                   
                 will be used to 
                 specified above. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 trigger email 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 notifications. 
               
               
                 EP-031 
                 GMReleaseActual 
                 One date for each 
                   
                 For information 
                 Date field per 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Planned Localized 
                   
                 only. In the future, 
                 LangRegionGroup 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Variation. 
                   
                 will be used to 
                 specified above. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 trigger email 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 notifications. 
               
               
                 EP-032 
                 Default Installer 
                 INF, EXE/BATCH, FILE COPY 
                 Install Property: 
                   
                 lookup table: INF, 
                 N (for major 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 Type (select from 
                   
                 Defined in 
                   
                 EXE/BATCH, FILE 
                 version) 
               
               
                   
                 list). 
                   
                 MajorVersion 
                   
                 COPY 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 as defaults, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 EP-033 
                 Default Setup File 
                 Path to setup file relative 
                 Install Property: 
                 Used by build tools 
                 \setup.exe or 
                 N (for major 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to top level folder of 
                 Defined in 
                 to find setup 
                 \DVGATE\config\setup. 
                 version) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 release. Text Field. 
                 MajorVersion 
                 executable. 
                 exe 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 as defaults, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 EP-034 
                 Default Command 
                 Arguments to be passed 
                 Install Property: 
                 Used by build tools 
                 /quiet/passive 
                 N (for major 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 Line Arguments 
                 to “Setup File”. Text 
                 Defined in 
                 when running setup 
                 /norestart -s 
                 version) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Field. 
                 MajorVersion 
                 executable. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 as defaults, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 EP-035 
                 Default OPK 
                 Yes/No: Set for each 
                 Install Property: 
                 Used by build tools. 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 Y (for major 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Engineering Organization 
                 Defined in 
                   
                   
                 version) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Major Version 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 as defaults, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 EP-036 
                 Default Base Plus 
                 Yes/No: Set for each 
                 Install Property: 
                 Used by build tools. 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 Y (for major 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Engineering Organization 
                 Defined in 
                   
                   
                 version) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 MajorVersion 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 as defaults, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 EP-037 
                 Default Recoverable 
                 Yes/No: Set for each 
                 Install Property: 
                 Used by tools. 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 Y (for major 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Engineering Organization 
                 Defined in 
                   
                   
                 version) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 MajorVersion 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 as defaults, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 EP-038 
                 Default Interactive 
                 Yes/No: user interaction 
                 Install Property: 
                 Used by build tools. 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 Y (for major 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 required? 
                 Defined in 
                   
                   
                 version) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 MajorVersion 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 as defaults, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 EP-039 
                 Vendor 
                 Vendor of the software. 
                 This is simply 
                   
                 Relation to Vendor 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 an additional 
                   
                 Index 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 attribute. It 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 should not be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 concatenated 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 with part name. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 There should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 a separate table 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 with basic 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Vendor 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 information. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Vendor name 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 may also be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 included in part 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 name if it 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 makes sense. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     10.4.4.1 Engineering Part Types 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Sub-Type 
                 Description 
                 Special Requirements 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Image 
                   
                 Image file(s) 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Foundation 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 P1 
                 WinPE image used for HDD Recovery Partition. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Monolithic Image 
                   
                   
               
               
                 OS Setup 
                   
                 OPK unattend setting, i386 folder. 
                 May include some OPK 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 specific attributes. 
               
               
                 Installable Application 
                   
                 Installed on customer partition. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Application 
                 Application as delivered from vendor. May be repackaged. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Driver 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Online Documents 
                 PDF Files and other documents installed on systems. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 OS Add-on 
                 QFE&#39;s, Patches 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Module 
                 Packaged application: non-interactive installation, secured, 
                 Can be X-module, module, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ready for factory delivery. Usually includes an application 
                 or EPC. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and some internal tools. 
                   
               
               
                 Internal Tools 
                   
                 Tools, DLL layer, P1 tools/files. 
                   
               
               
                 BIOS/Firmware 
                   
                 Firmware updates not recoverable by customer. 
                   
               
               
                 Media Set 
                 Recovery 
                 Customer recovery media. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Factory 
                 Media set for factory deployment. 
                   
               
               
                 Other 
                   
                 Catch all for other types of files. Can be anything, For 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Example “manual settings requests.” 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
         
         
           
             Part types will have different system workflows. 
             Some types or sub-types may require additional attributes to be captured in the system. 
             Functionality for sub-types within a part type is mostly the same. 
           
         
       
    
     10.4.4.2 LangRegion Table 
     The following table lists the LangRegions to be used initially. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Language 
                 LangRegion 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 en 
                 en_US 
                 English for USA. 
               
               
                   
                 en_GB 
                 English for UK and other EU. 
               
               
                   
                 en_int 
                 English for Asia Pacific. 
               
               
                 de 
                 de_DE 
                 German for Germany, Austria, Switzerland. 
               
               
                 fr 
                 fr_FR 
                 French for France, Belgium, Switzerland. 
               
               
                   
                 fr_CA 
                 French for Canada. 
               
               
                 ja 
                 ja_JP 
                 Japanese for Japan. 
               
               
                 ko 
                 ko_KR 
                 Korean for Korea. 
               
               
                 es 
                 es_ES 
                 Spanish for Spain. 
               
               
                   
                 es_lat 
                 Spanish for Latin America. 
               
               
                 it 
                 it_IT 
                 Italian for Italy, Switzerland. 
               
               
                 nl 
                 nl_NL 
                 Dutch for the Netherlands, Belgium. 
               
               
                 zh 
                 cns_CN 
                 Simplified Chinese for China. 
               
               
                 zh 
                 cnt_TW 
                 Traditional Chinese for Taiwan. 
               
               
                 pt 
                 pt_PT 
                 Portuguese for Portugal. 
               
               
                 el 
                 el_GR 
                 Greek for Greece. 
               
               
                 ru 
                 ru_RU 
                 Russian for Russia. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     REFERENCES 
     
         
         Language code (ISO-639) 
         http://ftp.ics.uci.edu/pub/ietf/http/related/iso639.txt 
         Region code (ISO-3166) 
         http://www.iso.org/iso/en/prods-services/iso3166ma/02iso-3166-code-lists/list-enl.html 
       
    
     10.4.5 Software Releases 
     For the attributes listed as “required” in search columns, only one of the required fields must be specified by the user.
 
Some attributes are duplicated between Engineering Part and Release: The attributes set for engineering part should be used as defaults when creating a new release. User can override values set for engineering part at the release level. This function is intended to reduce repetitive data entry due release check-in.
 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Intended Usage 
                 Examples 
                 Required 
                 Modifiable 
                 Basic Search 
                 Ext. Search 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 REL-001 
                 Release ID 
                 Integer identifier (possibly 
                 SITID(VOA)/ESP # 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 with part type prefix). 
                 (VOE)/Software ID (ITC) 
                   
                   
                 (auto) 
                   
                 (req) 
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 System generated. 
               
               
                 REL-002 
                 Detailed Version 
                 Full release version 
                 Can include the Major 
                   
                 4.0.4.00.25691 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 identifier. Text field. 
                 Version value. This is the 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 same as BOM VAIO&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Developer Software 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release Version” For 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Example: Major Version = 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 1.4, Detailed Version = 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 1.4.2 or 1.4.02.06070. 
               
               
                 REL-003 
                 Release Name 
                 Concatenation of “Part 
                 For Example: Sonic Stage 
                 Reporting. 
                 Generated: Adobe 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Name” + “Detailed 
                 1.4.02.06070 
                   
                 Premiere Standard 
                 (auto) 
                   
                 (req) 
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Version.” Not user 
                   
                   
                 4.0.4.00.25691 
               
               
                   
                   
                 editable. 
               
               
                 REL-004 
                 Target 
                 List of LangRegions to be 
                 Relation. 
                   
                 Relation to one or 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 LangRegions 
                 supported by this release. 
                   
                   
                 more LangRegions. 
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (en_US, en_GB, en_int, de_DE, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 fr_FR, fr_CA,, ja_JP, ko_KR, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 es_ES, es_lat, it_IT, nl_NL, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 cns_CN, cnt_TW, pt_PT, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 el_GR, ru_RU) 
               
               
                 REL-005 
                 Release Notes 
                 A log of notes. Each notes 
                 User can add a note to a 
                 For Information 
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                   
                 can belong to one of the 
                 release. User specifies 
                 Only. Reporting. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 categories listed below. 
                 category of the note at data 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entry time and categories 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 can be used to filter 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                 REL-006 
                 Status 
                 ES/Test, FF, 
                 FF (Feature Freeze)/CF 
                 Sanity checks 
                 Lookup table: 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Pilot, CF, RC, GM 
                 (Code Freeze) = WHQL 
                 during BOM 
                 ES/Test, FF, 
                   
                   
                 (req) 
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 candidate. 
                 snapshotting. 
                 Pilot, CF, RC, GM. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Reporting. 
               
               
                 REL-007 
                 Submitted By 
                 User who checked-in the 
                 Released By (VOE), 
                   
                 Relation to user 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 release. 
                 Contact to Developer (ITC) 
                   
                 index. 
                   
                   
                 (req) 
                 (req) 
               
               
                 REL-008 
                 Next Release 
                 Text field which specifies 
                   
                 For Information 
                 4.0.4.00.25693A to 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                   
                 next expected release 
                   
                 Only. Reporting. 
                 be released in late 
               
               
                   
                   
                 version and date. 
                   
                   
                 August 2007. 
               
               
                 REL-009 
                 Virus Check 
                 Dropdown 
                   
                 For Information 
                 TBD 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Only. Reporting. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                 REL-010 
                 WHQL status 
                 No submission/under 
                   
                 Sanity checks 
                 Lookup table: no 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 submission/passed/not 
                   
                 during BOM 
                 submission/under 
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 applicable. 
                   
                 snapshotting. 
                 submission/passed/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Reporting. 
                 not applicable. 
               
               
                 REL-011 
                 PlmStatus 
                 Dropdown 
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                 REL-012 
                 Is Default 
                 Yes/No 
                   
                 Snapshotting of 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 Release 
                   
                   
                 BOMs. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                 REL-013 
                 Is Latest Release 
                 Yes/No 
                   
                 Snapshotting of 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 BOMs. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                 REL-014 
                 Version Path 
                 Registry or file path (text). 
                 May be changed as part of 
                 Used by current 
                 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\ 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 a project globalization of 
                 VOA installation 
                 SOFTWARE\ 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 installation tools. 
                 tools to verify 
                 Microsoft\Updates\ 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 installation of a 
                 Windows 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 module. 
                 XP\SP3\KB901214\ 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Description\ 
               
               
                 REL-015 
                 Version ID 
                 Version of file or reg key 
                 May be changed as part of 
                 Used by current 
                 Security Update for 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                   
                 value(text). 
                 a project globalization of 
                 VOA installation 
                 Windows XP 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 installation tools. 
                 tools to verify 
                 (KB901214) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 installation of a 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 module. 
               
               
                 REL-016 
                 Version check 
                 Text field. Describes 
                   
                 For Information 
                 [How to identify 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                 before 
                 required installer version 
                   
                 Only. Reporting. 
                 this version] 
               
               
                   
                 installation. 
                 for the given release. 
                   
                   
                 Before Installation 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Check Version.txt 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 in installer 
               
               
                 REL-017 
                 Version check 
                 Text field. Describes 
                   
                 For Information 
                 [How to identify 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                 after installation. 
                 another method to 
                   
                 Only. Reporting. 
                 this version]After 
               
               
                   
                   
                 validation installation. 
                   
                   
                 Installation 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Check: Version.txt 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 under C:\Program 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Files\Sony\SonicStage 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Mastering Studio 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 including 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2.0.00.18220 
               
               
                 REL-018 
                 Change Log 
                 System generated history: 
                   
                   
                 System generated 
               
               
                   
                   
                 who changed release when. 
                   
                   
                 history: who 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 changed release 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 when. 
               
               
                 REL-019 
                 Installed Folder 
                 Text field describing path 
                   
                 Some build tools 
                 \\us-sd-itd-san- 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                 Path 
                 to installed files. 
                   
                 may use this field. 
                 1\swlibrary\isvrelease\ 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 0518002.SNC\ 
               
               
                 REL-021 
                 Installer Type 
                 INF, EXE/BATCH, FILE 
                 Install Property: Defined 
                   
                 lookup table: INF, 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 (select from list) 
                 COPY 
                 in MajorVersion as 
                   
                 EXE/BATCH, FILE 
                   
                   
                 (req) 
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 defaults, carried over to 
                   
                 COPY 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 REL-022 
                 Setup File 
                 Path to setup file relative to 
                 Install Property: Defined 
                 Used by build 
                 Setup.exe 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                   
                 top level folder of release. 
                 in MajorVersion as 
                 tools to find setup 
                   
                   
                 (if 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Text Field. 
                 defaults, carried over to 
                 executable. 
                   
                   
                 files 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be modified at 
                   
                   
                   
                 not 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
                   
                   
                   
                 uploaded) 
               
               
                 REL-023 
                 Command Line 
                 Arguments to be passed to 
                 Install Property: Defined 
                 Used by build 
                 /quiet/passive 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                 Arguments 
                 “Setup File”. Text Field. 
                 in MajorVersion as 
                 tools when 
                 /norestart -s 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 defaults, carried over to 
                 running setup 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be modified at 
                 executable. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 REL-024 
                 OPK 
                 Yes/No: Set for each 
                 Install Property: Defined 
                 Used by build 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Engineering Organization 
                 in MajorVersion as 
                 tools. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 defaults, carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 REL-025 
                 Base Plus 
                 Yes/No: Set for each 
                 Install Property: Defined 
                 Used by build 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Engineering Organization. 
                 in MajorVersion as 
                 tools. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 defaults, carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 REL-026 
                 Recoverable 
                 Yes/No: Set for each 
                 Install Property: Defined 
                 Used by tools. 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Engineering Organization. 
                 in MajorVersion as 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 defaults, carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 REL-027 
                 Interactive 
                 Yes/No: user interaction 
                 Install Property: Defined 
                 Used by build 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 required? 
                 in MajorVersion as 
                 tools. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 defaults, carried over to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Release, can be modified at 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 check-in. 
               
               
                 REL-028 
                 Repackaged 
                 Yes/No: Means release has 
                 Install Property 
                 For Information 
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 been modified from ISV 
                   
                 Only. Reporting. 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 original release. 
               
               
                 REL-029 
                 Snapshot ID 
                 Identifier of the BOM 
                 Relation. 
                 For Information 
                 Relation to 
                 N 
                 N 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                   
                 snapshot which was used 
                   
                 Only. Reporting. 
                 Snapshot Index 
               
               
                   
                   
                 for this release 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (componsite parts only). 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Dropped. System will use 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 active/inactive status 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 instead. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     10.4.5.1 Release Notice Categories 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Category 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 By Champion 
                   
               
               
                 By Builder 
                   
               
               
                 Other Notes 
                   
               
               
                 Description 
                   
               
               
                 Technical Description 
                   
               
               
                 New Features 
                   
               
               
                 Notification 
                 E.g. “Same as 2005.2Q” 
               
               
                 Installation Steps 
                 Step by step description of a manual install. 
               
               
                 Uninstall Steps 
                 Step by step description of a manual uninstall 
               
               
                   
                 process.C26 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     10.4.6 Groups 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 ID 
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Intended Usage 
                 Examples 
                 Required 
                 Modifiable 
                 Basic Search 
                 Ext. Search 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 GRP-001 
                 Group Name 
                   
                   
                   
                 Windows XP HE 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 OS Parts 
               
               
                 GRP-002 
                 Group ID 
                 Index ID 
                   
                   
                 Generated Index 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 GRP-003 
                 Comments 
                   
                   
                   
                 Text field: This 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 group is for all 
                   
                   
                 (keyword 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Windows XP HE 
                   
                   
                 search) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 images built 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 between 2002 and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2006. 
               
               
                 GRP-004 
                 Parts List 
                 Group Members 
                 Can be group, part name, 
                   
                 Relation to a list of 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 major version, release. 
                   
                 indexes. 
               
               
                 GRP-005 
                 Active 
                 Yes/No 
                   
                   
                 flag (0 or 1) 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y (req) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Dropped. Too 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Complicated. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Dropped. Too 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Complicated. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Dropped. Too 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Complicated. 
               
               
                 GRP-009 
                 Target Engineering Organization 
                 One or more eng org, all eng org. 
                 This will be part of a 
                   
                 Lookup Table(s) 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Define Target Criteria” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 function used throughout 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the system. 
               
               
                 GRP-010 
                 Target Series 
                 List of one or more 
                   
                   
                 IRX-3370, ATX- 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 series for which this 
                   
                   
                 7100 
               
               
                   
                   
                 group can only be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 used. 
               
               
                 GRP-011 
                 Target OS 
                 Select a single OS or 
                 This will be part of a 
                 For filtering, 
                 Lookup Table 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “All”. Default to all. 
                 “Define Target Criteria” 
                 reporting. Possibly 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 function used throughout 
                 used for sanity 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the system. 
                 checks. 
               
               
                 GRP-012 
                 Target LangRegions 
                 One or more LangRegions. 
                   
                 Used to select the 
                 Lookup Table 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 correct release for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 BOM snapshots. 
               
               
                 GRP-013 
                 Usage 
                 Intended usage for the group. 
                   
                 For filtering and 
                 Text field: This 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 organizing groups. 
                 group is for all 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Windows XP HE 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 images built 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 between 2002 and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2006, but only on 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Tuesdays. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     10.4.7 Snapshots (BOMs) 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Intended 
                   
                   
                   
                 Basic 
                 Ext. 
               
               
                 ID 
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Usage 
                 Examples 
                 Required 
                 Modifiable 
                 Search 
                 Search 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 SNP-001 
                 BOM ID 
                 Index field auto- 
                   
                   
                 Index field auto- 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 generated. 
                   
                   
                 generated. 
               
               
                 SNP-002 
                 Description 
                 Name &amp; Revision 
                 (Series/FI/RDVD/ 
                   
                 Horizon 3-HE 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (IE: Horizon 3-HE 
                 Monolithic/Module/ 
                   
                 Build01 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Build01) 
                 Factory Media) 
               
               
                 SNP-003 
                 Time and Date 
                 Auto-Generated 
                   
                   
                 Auto-Generated: 
               
               
                   
                 Stamp 
                   
                   
                   
                 Aug. 21, 2006 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 PST 
               
               
                 SNP-004 
                 Parent Part ID 
                 ID of Series, Image, 
                 Relation 
                   
                 Relation to Index 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 module, etc. 
                   
                   
                 of Parent part or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Group. 
               
               
                 SNP-005 
                 Child Part 
                 All part releases on 
                 Relation 
                   
                 Relation to a lisst 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y (return 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 Release Ids 
                 the BOM. 
                   
                   
                 of Release 
                   
                   
                 list of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Indexes. 
                   
                   
                 snaps 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 with 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 mathcing 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 child) 
               
               
                 SNP-006 
                 CTO Type 
                 Required/ 
                 Relation 
                   
                 Lookup Table 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Optional/HW 
                   
                   
                 Required/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Dependent 
                   
                   
                 Optional/HW 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Dependent 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     10.4.8 Defect Attributes 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Intended 
                 Exam- 
                   
                   
                 Basic 
                 Ext. 
               
               
                 ID 
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Usage 
                 ples 
                 Required 
                 Modifiable 
                 Search 
                 Search 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 DEF-001 
                 Defect ID 
                 Auto generated 
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 sequence. 
               
               
                 DEF-002 
                 Defect Status 
                 Open/Closed 
                 Defects can only be closed 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 if “Defect Resolution is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Fix-verified, Will Not Fix, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Deferred, Duplicate, or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Withdrawn.” 
               
               
                 DEF-004 
                 Defect Resolution 
                 Fixed, Fix-verified, 
                 Dropdown. Should be a 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Will Not Fix, 
                 configurable item. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Deferred, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Duplicate, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Withdrawn. 
               
               
                 DEF-005 
                 Responsible 
                 Can be one or more 
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 persons. 
                 users or a team. 
               
               
                 DEF-006 
                 Priority 
                 Must Fix, Should 
                 Dropdown. 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Fix, Optional Fix, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 None 
               
               
                 DEF-007 
                 Summary (Defect 
                   
                 Text field. 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 Title) 
               
               
                 DEF-008 
                 Description 
                   
                 Text area. 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 DEF-009 
                 Frequency 
                 Once, Always, 
                 Dropdown. 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Sometimes 
               
               
                 DEF-010 
                 Frequency Statistics 
                 X out of Y 
                 This can be entered if 
                 For use in 
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Frequency” is 
                 statistical 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Sometimes.” User can 
                 analysis. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 enter multiple “X of Y” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 sets for each defect. 
               
               
                 DEF-011 
                 Notes 
                   
                 Text area 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 DEF-012 
                 Related Test Cases 
                 Association with 
                 This cannot be a required 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 one or more test 
                 attribute because defects 
               
               
                   
                   
                 cases. 
                 can be logged without 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 associated test cases. 
               
               
                 DEF-013 
                 Steps to reproduce. 
                 Can be copied from 
                 Text area. 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 related test cases 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (attribute TST-010) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and edited. 
               
               
                 DEF-014 
                 Expected Results 
                 Can be copied from 
                 Text area. 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 related test cases 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (attribute TST-011) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and edited. 
               
               
                 DEF-015 
                 Workaround 
                   
                 Text area. 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 DEF-016 
                 Severity 
                 Values: 
                 Dropdown. Should be a 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0 - None 
                 configurable item - admin 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1 
                 screen not required. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 3 
               
               
                 DEF-017 
                 Exposure 
                 Values: 
                 Dropdown. Should be a 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1-LI (Legal 
                 configurable item - admin 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Implications) 
                 screen not required. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 2-HVCG 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (High Volume 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Call Generator) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 3-LNFU 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (Likely to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Notice with 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Frequent Use) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 4-LIDB (Likely 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to Ignore 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Defective 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Behavior) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 5-VUS (Very 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Unlikely will 
               
               
                   
                   
                 See) 
               
               
                 DEF-018 
                 Assigned to (parts) 
                 List of one or more 
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 engineering 
               
               
                   
                   
                 part/major versions, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 releases, HW parts, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or user defined 
               
               
                   
                   
                 parts associated 
               
               
                   
                   
                 with the defect. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Should be auto- 
               
               
                   
                   
                 populated if 
               
               
                   
                   
                 submitting from a 
               
               
                   
                   
                 failed test case. 
               
               
                 DEF-019 
                 Defect Submitter 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 DEF-020 
                 Submit Date 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 DEF-021 
                 Close Date 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 DEF-022 
                 Attachments 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                 DEF-023 
                 Sustaining status 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 DEF-024 
                 Sustaining Priority 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 DEF-025 
                 Microsoft Defect ID 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 DEF-026 
                 Beta ID 
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 DEF-027 
                 LangRegion 
                 One or more 
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LangRegion&#39;s to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 which the defect 
               
               
                   
                   
                 applies. User can 
               
               
                   
                   
                 also select All 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “LangRegions.” 
               
               
                 DEF-028 
                 Target Series 
                 The series for 
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 which the defect 
               
               
                   
                   
                 was first 
               
               
                   
                   
                 discovered. 
               
               
                 DEF-029 
                 Applicable Series 
                 List of all other 
                 This could be a system 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 series for which a 
                 maintainable attribute 
               
               
                   
                   
                 defect was 
                 based on part information. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 discovered. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     10.4.9 Test Case/Strategy Attributes 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Intended 
                 Exam- 
                   
                 Modi- 
                 Basic 
                 Ext. 
               
               
                 ID 
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
                 Comments 
                 Usage 
                 ples 
                 Required 
                 fiable 
                 Search 
                 Search 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 TST-001 
                 Test Case ID 
                 Auto-generated sequence. 
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                 TST-002 
                 Test Case 
                 Basic, Ad-hoc, Use Case, 
                 Drop-down. 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                 Type/Category 
                 Compatibility, FIV, 
                 For Benchmarks and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Benchmarks, MDA, 
                 MDA categories: key, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Screen Shot Capture, 
                 value, and expected 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Business Unit, 
                 value can be entered. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Accessory, and Other. 
                 For Screen Shot 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Capture category a .jpg 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 or .bmp image file can 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 be attached. 
               
               
                 TST-003 
                 Test Results 
                 Pass/Fail/Not 
                 Defaults to “Not 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Tested/Impeded stored by 
                 Tested.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 series, release combo. 
               
               
                 TST-004 
                 Part/Major Version 
                 One or more part/major 
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 versions to which the test 
               
               
                   
                   
                 case is constrained. 
               
               
                 TST-005 
                 Series 
                 One or more series to 
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 which the Test Case is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 constrained. 
               
               
                 TST-006 
                 Test Area 
                 Audio, Video, Still 
                 Dropdown. Should be 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Picture, Productivity, Etc. 
                 a configurable item via 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 admin screen. 
               
               
                 TST-007 
                 Purpose 
                   
                 Text area. 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 TST-008 
                 Requirements 
                   
                 Text area. 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                 TST-009 
                 Initial Conditions 
                   
                 Text field/Dropdown. 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                 TST-010 
                 Steps 
                   
                 Text area. 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                 TST-011 
                 Expected Results 
                   
                 Text area. 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                 TST-012 
                 Notes 
                   
                 Text area. 
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 TST-013 
                 Status 
                 Active, Obsolete, Etc. 
                 Dropdown. Should be 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 a configurable item via 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 admin screen. 
               
               
                 TST-014 
                 Level 
                 1 - Always Run, 
                 Dropdown 
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 2 - Sometimes Run, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 3 - Random 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Sampling/Sanity Check 
               
               
                 TST-015 
                 Time to Execute 
                 User estimate of time 
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 required to complete the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 test. Integer (in minutes). 
               
               
                 TST-016 
                 Submitter 
                 Auto - user who creates 
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 test case. 
               
               
                 TST-017 
                 Related Links 
                 One or more hyperlinks. 
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Can be a text field but 
               
               
                   
                   
                 system should interpret 
               
               
                   
                   
                 values as hyperlinks. 
               
               
                 TST-018 
                 Last Updated 
                 Auto 
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                 TST-019 
                 Excluded Series 
                 One or more series which 
                   
                   
                   
                 N 
                 Y 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 are excluded from this 
               
               
                   
                   
                 test case. 
               
               
                 TST-020 
                 Submit Date 
                 Date user created test 
                   
                   
                   
                 Y 
                 N 
                 N 
                 Y 
               
               
                   
                   
                 case. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     11 Production Rollout Plan 
     11.4 Deployment Locations 
     Now referencing  FIG. 23 , a non-limiting production rollout plan is shown.
 
As a global system, More than six places are involved in ePic network:
         Tokyo   Vagana   Shanghai   Czech   Brussels   San Diego   Other three factories in China
 
Engineers and factories are in these places:
   Engineer: San Diego, Brussels, Shanghai, Tokyo   Factory: San Diego, Czech, Nagano, Other three factories in Chin
           Network deployment diagram   
               

     11.5 Phased Rollout 
     EPic will be rolled out in two phases. 
     11.5.1 Phase 1 Release 
     Phase 1 Requirements will include the following ePic functionality:
         Parts Registration   Image and Module BOM Creation   Build System Interface   Series Software BOM Creation   DB Hero interface   File Store
 
This release includes full support for image and module building and series software BOM creation. This is essentially the ePic “kernel,”
       

     11.5.2 Phase 2 Release 
     Phase 2 Requirements will include the following ePic functionality:
         Test Management   Defect Tracking   Release to Manufacturing   Installation and Recovery Tool Support   VALSUN Interface   Mini-ePic
 
This release adds factory deployment, quality assurance, and customer recovery functionality to the ePic system.
       

     11.5.3 Sony Software Development Activities 
     VOA tools will be adapted to become the global recovery and installation tools. The release date for these new tools will be timed to coincide with the phase 2 release.
 
Build system modifications must be completed by VOA, VOE, and SDNA in order to build images and modules with ePic.
 
Plans for implementing and testing changes to build systems must be made the following milestones in mind:
         All required ePic system functionality will be implemented in the phase 1 release.   A warranty period will be in effect for a TBD period from date of the phase 2 release. After this, changes will be more costly.       

     12 Changes to Legacy Systems 
     12.1 Summary 
     12.1.1 VBD 
     Current Tools and Systems
         BOM VAIO—SDNA build system,   VELSUN/VALSUN—Defect tracking systems.       

     Changes to Tools &amp; Systems
         BOM VAIO will be replaced with VOA&#39;s ABU/Magellan,   VELSUN/VALSUN—transfer of defects from ePic to VELSUN/VALSUN must be established.       

     12.1.2 VOE 
     Current Tools and Systems
         EIS—VOE Project and Software Management System.   Tracker—Image Building and Tracking System.       

     Changes to Tools &amp; Systems
         ePic will not support VOE build system since images will no longer be developed at VOE.       

     12.1.3 VOA 
     
         
         
           
             SW Plan—excel file defining the software BOM. 
             VSMS—the “VA 10 Software Management System.” 
             ABU/Magellan—automated image building tools. 
             Oasis—MCode tool used to support testing. 
             MINDS—automated installation system used by testers. 
             Pacific—tools used to install software in the factory. 
             Recovery Tools—use a localized version of the SDNA GREEN engine.
           Changes to Tools &amp; Systems
               The SW Plan excel file will no longer be used. The data contained therein will be maintained in DB Hero.   VSMS, Oasis, and MINDS will be replaced with ePic.   ABU/Magellan will be made to interface with the ePic.   VOA installation and recovery tools will be modified to become the global toolset.   OASIS must be modified to create a floppy based on a single direct HTTP request.   
               
         
           
         
       
    
     12.2 Build System Changes 
     Three regional build tool implementations must be modified to work with ePic. Objects created by each regional build system may change to comply with the global modular and recovery specifications, which are to be defined as part of this project.
 
This section lists current build system artifacts from each region&#39;s build system and mappings to ePic fields. The ePic fields listed below are detailed in Section 10.4 of this document. Note that in some cases the format and meaning of the attribute may have changed from the current state. For example, Software Release ID (formerly ESP #, SITID, etc.) will now be an integer with a prefix denoting part type (this will necessitate changes to all three build systems).
 
Architectural note:
         Build process should not be interrupted by WAN outages.   Caching build data can shield you from WAN outage:
           Option 1: Build tools interface directly with ePic; caching mechanism can be built into build tools.   Option 2: Existing SW system; (MS BOM VAIO, VSMS) can be used to cache ePic data (possibly lessening impact to build tools).
 
[VOA has chosen to build a caching mechanism into its build system.]
   
               

     12.2.1 VOA-E Build Tools 
     12.2.1.1 Build Tools Overview 
     Build Tools create the following objects:
         Foundation Image   Base Plus Image   Monolithic Image   P1 Recovery Image   Module, X-Module, EPC   Factory Deployment Media (RDVD, PIDVD, BDVD)   PAC Files   P1 Recovery Image   PE Module   Data file
 
Database information required includes: Project Info, BOM Info, Component Info (location on server etc).
 
Files required by Build tools include: OS files, Component Installers (drivers, apps) Output files created by Magellan for use by Automated Build Utility (ABU), Chrysalis recovery tools and others are discussed in the next sections.
 
12.2.1.2 Files required by Automated Build Utility (ABU) to Create Foundation and Base-Plus Images.
 
Script.INI: Contains all items on Image BOM with BasePlus set to FALSE.
 
BScript.INI: Contains all items on Image BOM with BasePlus set to TRUE and IntegrationMethod is not OPK.
 
OPKScript.INI: Contains all items on Image BOM with BasePlus set to TRUE and IntegrationMethod is OPK.
       

     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 VSMS Fields 
                 Corresponding ePic fields 
               
               
                 used to create above 3 files. 
                 (refer ePic-Attribs_20050808.xls). 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Project name: used for querying 
                 EP-001 
               
               
                 and to create folder 
                   
               
               
                 on network to store these files. 
                   
               
               
                 Build name: used for querying 
                 REL-003 
               
               
                 and to create folder 
                   
               
               
                 on network to store these files. 
                   
               
               
                 BasePlus: check OPK integration 
                 REL-025 
               
               
                 method only for Base Plus. 
                   
               
               
                 IntegrationMethod: used by tools &amp; 
                 EP-005, EP-006, REL-021 
               
               
                 check for OPK items. 
                   
               
               
                 Silent: Don&#39;t use IntegrationMethod 
                 EP-038, REL-027 
               
               
                 if not Silent. 
                   
               
               
                 BiosLockNo: uniquely identifies 
                 EP-012 
               
               
                 image. 
                   
               
               
                 ReleaseName 
                 REL-003 
               
               
                 Sitid 
                 REL-001 
               
               
                 NetPath 
                 REL-020 or Mini ePic part 
               
               
                 Switches 
                 REL-023 
               
               
                 InstallInstructions 
                 REL-Installation steps 
               
               
                 BuildInfo 
                 REL-By Builder 
               
               
                 VersionPath 
                 REL-014 
               
               
                 VersionID 
                 REL-015 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     12.2.1.3 Files Required to Automate Module Creation. 
     MScript.INI: Contains all items on Module BOM.
 
VSMS Fields used: Same as above.
 
     12.2.14 Files Required by Chrysalis Recovery Tools. 
     SonyPac.cmd 
     Is a batch file that creates the structure of one or more PAC files by copying the software releases (that make up the PAC file) from the network to a folder on the local machine. Each folder corresponds to a PAC file. The builder then runs the Pack tool to create a PAC file from the contents of each folder. It is required to create more than one PAC file as one PAC file may not fit on one disc. It contains all items on Image BOM with IsSingleApplicationRecovery is TRUE. 
                                 VSMS Fields used:   Corresponding ePic fields.                  ProjectName: used for querying, not   EP-001       contained in the file.           Build: used for querying, not contained   REL-003       in the file.           SITID: to create folder on local machine.   REL-001       IsSingleApplicationRecovery: used for   REL-026       querying, not contained in the file.           SITInstallProgram: Location on file server.   REL-020/Mini ePic       Pac_File: this value is set in VSMS prior to   Obsolete in ePic. Move the       creating this file by calculating (according   Pac file assignment       to size) which PAC file this software   functionality to Magellan       goes on.   (dynamically assign instead           of storing in database).                    
Appinfo.ini: Contains all applications and drivers that go on the Foundation Image and are available for recovery through Chrysalis (Single Application Recovery).
 
                                 VSMS Fields used:   Corresponding ePic fields.                  Project name: used to create folder on   EP-001       network to store these files.           Build name: used to create folder on network   REL-003       to store           these files.           ARCDFolder: used to distinguish Drivers   EP-005, 006       from Applications.           ARCDTitle: used as display title for   EP-010       Applications.           IntegrationMethod: should be OPK-Driver   EP-006       for drivers.           Used for querying.           ReleaseName: used as display title for   REL-003       Drivers.           ARCDSpec: text description (hover text).   EP-011       SITInstallProgram: installer file.   REL-020, 022/Mini ePic       SITID: used for unpacking.   REL-001       IsSingleApplicationRecovery: determine   REL-026       if compressed.           Pac_File: used to determine correct   Obsolete; generated by       PAC file.   external tool dynamically.       InstallOrder: used to install in a given   EP-009       sequence.           Prompts:                    
12.2.1.5 Files required for BDVD
 
AllModules.TXT: Contains all modules and EPCs on a base unit.
 
                                             Corresponding           VSMS Fields used:   ePic fields.                      ProjectName: used for querying, not   EP-001           contained in the file.               ReleaseName   REL-003           Installer   REL-020, 21, 22                    
12.2.1.6 Files required for Media Creation
 
perm modulues.cmd: Contains all permanent modules and EPCs for base unit (IsPermanent is TRUE).
 
temp modules.cmd: Contains all temporary modules and EPCs for base unit (IsPermanent is FALSE).
 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Corresponding 
               
               
                   
                 VSMS Fields used: 
                 ePic fields. 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 ProjectName: used for querying, not 
                 EP-001 
               
               
                   
                 contained in the file. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 isPermanent 
                 EP-025(reverse logic) 
               
               
                   
                 ReleaseName 
                 REL-003 
               
               
                   
                 Installer 
                 REL-020, 21, 22 
               
               
                   
                 Sitid 
                 REL-001 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     12.2.1.7 Files Required by Minds/Pacific 
     MINDS.CSV 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 VSMS Fields used: 
                 Corresponding ePic fields. 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Pcode 
                 Series attributes TBD 
               
               
                   
                 BLID 
                 EP-012 
               
               
                   
                 Phase 
                 REL-003 
               
               
                   
                 Setup 
                 REL-022 
               
               
                   
                 VersionID 
                 REL-015 
               
               
                   
                 Swmcode 
                 TBD 
               
               
                   
                 Version 
                 REL-002 
               
               
                   
                 SITID 
                 REL-001 
               
               
                   
                 Release Name 
                 REL-003 
               
               
                   
                 BaseUnit 
                 Series attributes TBD 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 EP-005, 006 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     12.2.1.8 Files Required by Japan 
     BaseUnitInfo.INI: Contains all base units for a project. 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 VSMS Fields used: 
                 Corresponding ePic fields. 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 BaseUnit 
                 Series attributes TBD 
               
               
                   
                 BaseUnitID 
                   
               
               
                   
                 SalesType 
                   
               
               
                   
                 ModelNo_JP 
                   
               
               
                   
                 OS 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Product Mcode 
                   
               
               
                   
                 C-Partition Size 
                   
               
               
                   
                 P1 Partition Size 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     12.2.1.9 Other Functionality 
     Build tools also check in software releases and images and thus need to be able to have a method of writing release data to the database. 
     13 APPENDIX 
     13.4 Terminology 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Business 
                 CTO 
                 General 
                 Configure To Order 
                 Produce (configure) a product after taking the 
               
               
                 related 
                   
                   
                   
                 order. 
               
               
                   
                 BTO 
                 General 
                 Build To Order 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Retail sales, 
                 General 
                   
                 Selling product through normal shop channel. 
               
               
                   
                 Direct sales, Online sales 
                 General 
                   
                 Selling product through internet (Web). 
               
               
                   
                 B2B 
                 General 
                 Business To Business 
                 Selling product to corporate customer directly 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 from Sony. 
               
               
                   
                 B2C 
                 General 
                 Business To Consumer 
                   
               
               
                   
                 SMB 
                 General 
                 Small Business 
                 Small company like 50 employees. 
               
               
                   
                 Enterprise 
                 General 
                 Enterprise 
                 Big company. 
               
               
                   
                 SOHO 
                 General 
                 Small Office Home 
                 Very small company like 0 to 3 employees. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Office 
                 Use home as office. 
               
               
                 Product Design 
                 BOM 
                 General 
                 Bill Of Material 
                 List of parts (materials) to produce a product. 
               
               
                 activity 
                 SW BOM 
                 General 
                 Software Bill Of 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Material 
                   
               
               
                   
                 ES 
                   
                 Engineering Sample 
                   
               
               
                   
                 FF 
                   
                 Feature Freeze 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Pilot Build 
                   
                 Pilot Build 
                 Test Build 
               
               
                   
                 RC 
                 General 
                 Release Candidate 
                   
               
               
                   
                 GM 
                 General 
                 Golden Master 
                 Final and approved master software file. 
               
               
                   
                 RTM 
                   
                 Release to Manufacturing 
                   
               
               
                   
                 DVT 
                 Sony 
                 Design Validation T 
                 Hardware prototype for design validation. 
               
               
                   
                 PVT 
                 Sony 
                 Production Validation T 
                 Hardware prototype for production validation, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 almost final product. 
               
               
                   
                 MP 
                   
                 Mass Production 
                 Real product production, not sample, not 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 prototype. 
               
               
                   
                 Ex factory 
                   
                   
                 First shipping out of the mass production 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 product. 
               
               
                   
                 SKU 
                 General 
                 Stock Keeping Unit 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Build 
                   
                   
                 Combine many software pieces to make single 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 big image file to be copied onto Hard Disk 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Drive of target PC. 
               
               
                   
                 Image build, build image 
                   
                   
                 Combine many software pieces to make single 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 big image file to be copied onto Hard Disk 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Drive of target PC. 
               
               
                   
                 Integration 
                   
                   
                 Combine many software pieces to make single 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 big image file to be copied onto Hard Disk 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Drive of target PC. 
               
               
                   
                 Software Integration 
                   
                   
                 Combine many software pieces to make single 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 big image file to be copied onto Hard Disk 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Drive of target PC. 
               
               
                   
                 Preinstall 
                   
                   
                 Install application onto a product so that 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 customer doesn&#39;t have to install the software 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 himself. 
               
               
                   
                 Recovery 
                 Microsoft 
                   
                 When a customer wants to go back to factory 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 state, “Recovery” to be done. 
               
               
                   
                 Hard Disk Recovery 
                 Microsoft 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 External Recovery Media 
                 Microsoft 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Recovery CD, 
                 Microsoft 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Recovery DVD 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 BIOS Lock ID, BLID 
                 Sony 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 M-Code 
                 Sony 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 BIOS 
                 PC 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 DMI 
                 PC 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Registry 
                 Microsoft 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 OPK 
                 Microsoft 
                 OEM Pre-installation Kit 
                   
               
               
                   
                 OOBE 
                 Microsoft 
                 Out Of Box Experience 
                 Windows Setup screens at very first power-on. 
               
               
                   
                 Serial number 
                 General 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Service Tag 
                 PC 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 OSR 
                 ITC 
                 OS Recovery or System 
                 Recover the image file. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Recovery 
                   
               
               
                   
                 APR 
                 ITC 
                 Application Recovery 
                 Recover (install) application(s). 
               
               
                   
                 SAR (ITE) 
                 ITE 
                 Smart Application 
                 Same meaning as “APR” in SDNA. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Recovery 
                   
               
               
                   
                 VSRU 
                 ITC 
                 VAIO System Recovery 
                 Utility name. Recover the image file, using 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Utility 
                 Green Engine. 
               
               
                   
                 VARU 
                 ITC 
                 VAIO Application 
                 Utility name 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Recovery Utility 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Wise 
                 General 
                 www.wise.com 
                 Software name to make a package. 
               
               
                   
                 Install Shield 
                 General 
                 www.installshield.com 
                 Software name to make an installer. 
               
               
                   
                 F.I. 
                 VOA 
                 Foundation Image 
                   
               
               
                   
                 MINDS 
                 VOA 
                 Module Installation . . . 
                   
               
               
                   
                 VSMS 
                 VOA 
                 VAIO Software Management 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 System 
               
               
                   
                 ABU 
                 VOA 
                 Automatic Build Utility 
                   
               
               
                   
                 EIS 
                 ITE 
                 Engineering Information 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 System 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Tracker 
                 ITE 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 BomVAIO 
                 ITC 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 BugVAIO 
                 ITC 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Valsan 
                 ITC 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 IRT server 
                 ITC 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Librarian 
                 VOA 
                   
                 Image planning. 
               
               
                   
                 Build Architect 
                 ITE 
                   
                 Image planning. 
               
               
                   
                 Builder 
                 ITC 
                   
                 Image planning. 
               
               
                   
                 PM 
                   
                 Project Manager 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Multi Language SKU 
                 ITE 
                   
                   
               
               
                 DB Hero 
                 Series 
                 VBD 
                   
                 A product platform. For example, “Horizon.” 
               
               
                 terminology 
                 Class 
                 VBD 
                   
                 A concept representing a set of customer 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 choices. For example “Hard Drive” (choices 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 might be “100 GB”, “200 GB”, or “250 GB”). 
               
               
                   
                 Spec 
                 VBD 
                   
                 Represents a single customer choice. 
               
               
                   
                 Config Range 
                 VBD 
                   
                 The set of classes that constitute the full 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (global) range of customer choices for a given 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 series. Can be used by a sales system to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 provide CTO offerings to customers. 
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 VBD 
                   
                 Phantom BOM item. Derived from Config 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 range during DB Hero block definition process. 
               
               
                   
                 Component Structure 
                 VBD 
                   
                 List of components for a given structure with 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 parts as children. This is considered the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 “manufacturing BOM.” 
               
               
                 Factory 
                 PCN 
                   
                 Production Change 
                 Change form used to disclose any non-BOM 
               
               
                 terminology 
                   
                   
                 Notice 
                 related changes to the factory. 
               
               
                   
                 ECN 
                   
                 Engineering Change 
                 Change form used to disclose BOM changes to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Notice 
                 the factory. 
               
               
                   
                 EPC 
                 VOE/VOA 
                 Engineering Process 
                 Running change to software. Consists of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Change 
                 change notification and a corresponding 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 software module. 
               
               
                   
                 Factory Process 
                   
                   
                 Generic term used to refer to all activities 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 performed in the factory in order to produce 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 units. 
               
               
                   
                 ERP 
                   
                 Enterprise resource 
                 Generic term for inventory, planning, and order 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 planner 
                 management systems used in support of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 manufacturing or order fulfillment. Oracle, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 SAP, JD Edwards, etc. 
               
               
                   
                 Configuration BOM 
                 VOA 
                   
                 The bill of materials for a specific PC 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 configuration. 
               
               
                   
                 Platform BOM 
                 VOA 
                   
                 A bill of materials which encapsulates CTO 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 customer choices (like the DB Hero Config 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 range). 
               
               
                   
                 Phantom BOM 
                 VOA 
                   
                 A bill of materials representing the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 manufacturing BOM for a series (like DB Hero 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 component structure). Phantom BOM items 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 can be included as customer choices on the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 platform BOM. 
               
               
                   
                 SMAP 
                   
                 Simple Manufacturing 
                 Unit testing framework used to drive the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Advanced Process 
                 automated factory process in Sony VAIO 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 factories. Imaging in the factory occurs as a 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 SMAP process step. 
               
               
                 Sony Terminology: 
                 VBD or ITC 
                 VAIO Business 
                 Tokyo Group 
                 Formerly 
               
               
                 Department 
                   
                 Division 
                   
                 called ITC. 
               
               
                 name 
                 VOA or ITD 
                 VAIO of America 
                 America Group, San 
                 Formerly 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Diego 
                 called ITD or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ITA. 
               
               
                   
                 VOE or ITE 
                 VAIO of Europe 
                 Europe Group, 
                 Formerly 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Brussels 
                 called ITE. 
               
               
                   
                 STC 
                 Sony Shanghai 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Tec Center 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 SNT 
                 Sony Nagano Factory 
                 200 km from Tokyo 
                   
               
               
                   
                 IT-M 
                 Sony San Diego 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Manufacturing 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 division 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 SVL 
                 Taiwan Exteranl Labo 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 ODM 
                 China Manufacturing 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Sony Digital Network 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 SDNA 
                 Applications Inc., 
                 Tokyo Group 
                 Formerly a 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 part of ITC. 
               
               
                 Others 
                 SEN 
                 Sony Enterprise 
                 Sony Corporate Network 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Network 
                 (intranet). Firewalled. 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     13.5 Current Process Flows 
     13.5.1 VOA &amp; IT-M 
     13.5.1.1 Planning 
     Below is sequence of how VOA SW planning occurs currently:
         Explore new ISV business opportunities [VOA-Product Planning &amp; VOA-PM] [Ongoing, but not necessary need to be tracked in DB].   Create 1st draft of SW Planning Strategy in ppt by VOA-E PM (N-17).
           a SW Strategy consists of
               No platform or project information yet.   80% of Sony software titles leveraged from previous cycle (including utilities &amp; Sony software, but no drivers).   Sony Utilities are not updated at this point (No visibility until engineering meeting).   Some Sony Software is updated at this point (Info is through grapevine, and not firm until engineering meeting).   SW Planning strategy or planning BOMs do not reflect drivers.   20% of ISV software (mostly leverage from previous cycle).   Any ISV addition here are 75% firm.   
               Software is also added or remove from SW CTO configuration strategies chart.
               Grouping of multiple modules to define an offering strategy starts here. Also defines offering rules.   
               Project code names at this point only, no detailed base units names or configuration on PPT.   
           Review 1st draft of SW Planning Strategy in ppt with VOA PP &amp; ITPD (N-16).
           a Gather questions &amp; consensus prior to Engineering meeting.
               Make necessary SW plan or offering strategy adjustment up to engineering meeting.   
               Usually not much change here, mostly just to keep ITPD in sync with upcoming strategy.   95% of ISV software are fixed.   
           Present 2nd draft of SW Planning Strategy in ppt @ Engineering meeting in Japan (N-15).
           2rd draft includes &amp; updates from PP &amp; ITPD meeting from above.   Below is what occurs during engineering meeting:
               Gather updates &amp; add new Sony Utilities (Utilities strategy are fixed &amp; owned by ITC per platform).   Gather updates &amp; add new Sony Software (Sony SW strategies are mostly fixed and owned by ETC per platform. Occasionally, each region are given a choice on certain software pending lead time or if conflicts with local ISV SW strategy.   Versions of the above are gathered and updated to SW Strategy ppt (Build revisions are not reflected in SW Strategies or SW planning BOM since they are fixed during integration stage, only reflected in VSMS),   ISV Software are presented to ITC (purely to inform them of local strategies).   
               
           Create 3rd draft of SW Planning Strategy (still in ppt format) (N-14).
           3rd draft of the ppt includes updates from engineering meeting.
               Platform is reflected only if certain software are assigned to specific SKUs.   
               Review 3rd draft with ITPD and VOA-PP to share information from engineering meeting.   
           Review with internal groups (SIT &amp; PQD) by N-13.
           SW Planning strategy ppt should be fixed.   SIT starts to prepare BOM layout in VSMS with SKU &amp; HW config charts.   
           From N-13 to RTM.
           VOA-PM turns the ppt into SW Planning BOM (in xls format) &amp; adds platform &amp; base units.
               SW Plan reflects how SW are associated in VSMS each base units,   Either as modules or in foundation image.   if in modules, it also reflects if it should be Require “R”, Default “D”, or Optional “O” per base unit.   Changes throughout the cycle occurs first in xls &amp; announced to SIT &amp; PQD (VOA-PP &amp; ITPD as well) every Thursday.   SW Plan is also used during BOM Freeze (Milestone) to verify that modules assigned in VSMS are all accounted for in both plan &amp; BOM (per base units with each particular projects&#39;s BOM Freeze).   SW Plan will also be used by ITM royalty reporting group after project RTMs.   SW Plan is not used by marketing spec sheet generation, instead a VSMS base unit BOM is used (base unit BOM includes every software, including drivers).   
               
           Future Objectives
           Elimination of SW planning BOM.
               Go straight from Strategy ppt to VSMS.   Updates should occur in VSMS and populated to projects.   
               Royalty information be assigned according to base units/platform or SW module (Not necessary at planning stage, but need it by RTM).   
               

     13.5.1.2 Software Integration 
       FIG. 23A  shows a non-limiting software integration process: 
     13.5.1.3 Factory Deployment Process 
     In reference to  FIG. 24 , the process flow captures a process for deploying CTO software in the factory.
 
Many of the activities depicted in  FIG. 24  are manual, with some small helper applications in use to speed up the work. Some of these activities are executed in parallel with the software integration process.
 
     13.5.2 VOE 
     13.5.2.1 Software Integration 
     
         
         
           
             Engineers enter ESP numbers from software plan into EIS via UI. 
             EIS provides a build script via UI. 
             Builder supplies script to build system. 
             Build system builds item. 
             Tracker provides BIOS lock number, image number, and other data to build system. 
           
         
       
    
     13.5.3 VBD 
     13.5.3.1 Software Integration (SDNA) 
     
         
         
           
             BOM VAIO is standalone database system. 
             Build tools retrieve build data via database link to BOM VAIO. 
           
         
       
    
     13.6.5 RPT-5: BOM Report 
     13.6.6 RPT-6: Module Release Report 
     MOD-Premiere_Pro Build07 
     BOM Info: 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Software Title 
                 Index ID 
                 Version 
                 Defect Owner 
                 Recoverable 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Adobe, Multimedia, Premiere 
                 0411303.ADB 
                 1.0.00.0404220 
                 Smith 1 
                 No 
               
               
                 Delete DVDBurn 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Adobe, Multimedia, Premiere 
                 0419801.ADB 
                 1.5.0.0 
                 Smith 2 
                 Yes 
               
               
                 Pro 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Sony ITC, Multimedia, VAIO 
                 0504604.SNC 
                 5.0.01.14040 
                 Smith 2 
                 Yes 
               
               
                 Edit Components 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Adobe, Marketing Material, 
                 0407101.ADB 
                 1.1.00.0403110 
                 Smith 1 
                 Yes 
               
               
                 Premiere Pro SerNum and 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Readme 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Sony ITD, Build Image Tool, 
                 0504903.SND 
                 5.0.1 
                 Smith 3 
                 No 
               
               
                 MCODE Reader 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Sony ITD, Tools, MN.DLL 
                 0306502.SND 
                 1.2.1 
                 Smith 3 
                 No 
               
               
                 142 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Release Information 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 BOM Version: 7.0.0.0 
                   
                 Date Submitted: 2/8/05 
               
               
                   
                   
                 4:23:54 PM 
               
               
                 Purpose: Integration 
                 Location: 
                 Source Size (Bytes): 307704991 
               
               
                   
                 Server 
               
               
                 Version Verification ID: 
                   
                 Type: Module 
               
               
                 0503904.SND 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Version Verification Path: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Sony 
               
               
                 Corporation\Modules\MOD-Premiere_Pro\Version 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Integration Information 
     Install Command Line: \\us-sd-itd-san-1\swlibrary\lsvrelease\0503904.SND\VIDP070503904.exe-*56GnArS40 
     Application Recovery Text: 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Single Application 
                 Requires User Interaction? 
                 WHQL Certified? 
               
               
                 Recovery? 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
       
       
     
     Notes 
     Build Info: 
     [Smith 4-2/20/05 10:23:00 AM] 
     Summer05-New Version of VEC and New Mread.exe. 
     Install Instructions: 
     [Smith 4-2/20/05 10:23:00 AM] 
     Uninstall Instructions: 
     [Smith4-2/20/05 10:23:00 AM] 
     Use Add/Remove programs. 
     Release Notes: 
     [Smith 4-2/20/05 10:23:00 AM] 
     New Version of VEC and fixed mread issue. 
     By Champion: 
     By Builder: 
     Other Notes: 
     Series BOM Associations 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Registered 
                 Registry 
               
               
                 Series Name 
                 Status 
                 By 
                 Date 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Hogwarts4-MC 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 4 
                 2005/02/20 
               
               
                 Hogwarts4_Chrysalis3_Test 
                 In progress 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/06/07 
               
               
                 Horizon2-HE 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 4 
                 2005/02/20 
               
               
                 Horizon2-MC 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/04/19 
               
               
                 Horizon2-PR 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 4 
                 2005/02/20 
               
               
                 Horizon3_GD-HE 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/06/09 
               
               
                 Horizon3_GD-MC 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/06/09 
               
               
                 Horizon3_GD-PR 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/06/09 
               
               
                 Jennys_module_test_project 
                 In progress 
                 Smith 4 
                 2005/02/20 
               
               
                 LeonS2-HE 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 4 
                 2005/02/20 
               
               
                 LeonS2-PR 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 4 
                 2005/02/20 
               
               
                 LeonS2_Multi-recovery_test 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/02/24 
               
               
                 LeonV-HE 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/06/29 
               
               
                 LeonV-PR 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/06/29 
               
               
                 Messenger-HE 
                 In progress 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/10/14 
               
               
                 Messenger-PR 
                 In progress 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/10/14 
               
               
                 Sherry_WWAN-PR 
                 In progress 
                 Smith 4 
                 2005/10/05 
               
               
                 Spirit2-HE 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 4 
                 2005/02/20 
               
               
                 Spirit2-PR 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 4 
                 2005/02/20 
               
               
                 Spirit3-HE 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/06/15 
               
               
                 Spirit3-PR 
                 Shipping 
                 Smith 5 
                 2005/06/15 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Attachments 
     13.6.7 RPT-7: Group Report 
     13.6.8 RPT-8: Image BOM Report 
     13.6.9 RPT-9: BOM Freeze Report 
     FI-Inazma-PR (Build03) Image BOM Report 
       
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 VCC Descriptions 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Vendor 
                 Component 
                 Release Name 
                 Hover Text 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Adobe 
                 Productivity 
                 Adobe Reader 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;Document viewer: View, navigate, and print PDF and E- 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Book format documents. &lt;/ENG&gt; &lt;FRA&gt;Visionneuse de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 document: La vue, dirigent, et impriment des documents de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 format de PDF et E-Book&lt;/FRA&gt; &lt;ESN&gt;Espectador del 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 documento: La visión, navega, e imprime documentos del formato 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 del PDF y del E-Book.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Alps 
                 Driver-Mouse 
                 Touchpad 
                 Touchpad Driver 
               
               
                 Google 
                 Communication 
                 Google Toolbar 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;Maximizes your web searching 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 experience.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Facilite vos recherches sur 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 internet.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Maximiza su tela que busca 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 experiencia.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Intel 
                 Driver-System 
                 Intel 
                 Intel 915GM/PM/GMS 910GML Alviso Driver 
               
               
                   
                   
                 915GM_PM_GMS_910GML 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Alviso 
               
               
                 Macromedia 
                 Multimedia 
                 Flash Player 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;Play back videos and audio generated in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Flash.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Lecture de vidéos et de fichiers audio créés 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 avec Flash&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Juegue los videos traseros, audio 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 generado en flash.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 Battery Check Utility 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;Manage your notebook power 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 settings.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Gérez les paramètres d&#39;alimentation de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 votre ordinateur portable.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Maneje sus ajustes de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 energia del cuaderno.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Shared Library 
                 ImageStation Library 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;A program utility facilitating ImageStation 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 access.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Un utilitaire facilitant l&#39;accès á 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 ImageStation.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Una utilidad del programa que 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     FI-Inazma-PR (Build03) Image BOM Report 
       
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 VCC Descriptions 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Vendor 
                 Component 
                 Release Name 
                 Hover Text 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 facilita el acceso de ImageStation.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 Memory Stick Pro Formatter 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;A program utility for formatting a Memory 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Stick.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Un utilitaire permettant de formater un 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Memory Stick.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Una utilidad del programa para 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 ajustar a formato un Memory Stick.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Multimedia 
                 OpenMG Setup 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;A program utility required by 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OpenMG.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Un utilitaire indispensable à 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OpenMG.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Una utilidad del programa requerida por 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 OpenMG.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 Setting Utility Series 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;A program for customizing your utility series 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 settings.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Un programme pour personnaliser les 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 paramètres de vos utlitaires.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Un programa para 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 modificar sus ajustes para uso general de la serie para requisitos 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 particulares.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Shared Library 
                 Sony Shared Library 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;A program utility required for Sony 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 applications.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Un utilitaire pour les applications 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Sony.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Una utilidad del programa para los usos de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Sony.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Shared Library 
                 Sony Video Shared Library 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;A program utility required for video editing 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 applications.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Un utilitaire indispensable pour les 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 applications d&#39;édition vidéo.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Una utilidad del 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 programa requerida para el video que corrige usos.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Shared Library 
                 SonyUtils 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;A program utility required for VAIO 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 applications.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Un utilitaire indispensable pour les 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 applications VAIO.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Una utilidad del programa 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 requerida para los usos de VAIO.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Multimedia 
                 VAIO Entertainment Platform 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;A utility program that installs the VAIO Entertainment 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Platform.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Un utilitaire permettant d&#39;installer la 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Plateforme VAIO Entertainment.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Un programa 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 utilitario que instala la VAIO Entertainment Platform.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 VAIO Event Service 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;A program utility to control specific applications in your 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 VAIO computer.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Un utilitaire pour contróler les 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 applications spécifiques de votre ordinateur de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 VAIO.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Usos especificos de un tocontrol para uso 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 general del programa en su computadora de VAIO.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 VAIO Power Management 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;Manage your notebook power 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 settings.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Gérez les paramétres d&#39;alimentation de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 votre ordinateur portable.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Maneje sus ajustes de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 energia del cuaderno.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 VAIO Update 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;Get notifications of the latest driver and news related to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 your VAIO computer.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;Recevez les notifications 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 vous informant des pilotes les plus récents ainsi que les derniéres 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 nouvelles concernant votre ordinateur de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 VAIO.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;Consiga las notificaciones del conductor y 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 de las noticias más últimos relacionados con su computadora de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 VAIO.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Documentation 
                 Latest Information 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;Latest Information.&lt;/ENG&gt; &lt;FRA&gt;La Plus défunte 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Information&lt;/FRA&gt; &lt;ESN&gt;La Información Más última&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Documentation 
                 Recovery Guide 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;VAIO Recovery Guide.&lt;/ENG&gt; &lt;FRA&gt;Guide De 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Réinstallation&lt;/FRA&gt; &lt;ESN&gt;Guia De la Recuperación&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Tools 
                 VAIO Drivers 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;VAIO Drivers installs the VAIO drivers to their original 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 shipping condition.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;VAIO Drivers installe les 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 conducteurs de VAIO sur leur condition d&#39;expédition 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 originale.&lt;/FRA&gt;&lt;ESN&gt;VAIO Drivers instala los conductores de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 VAIO a su condición de envio original.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Documentation 
                 VAIO User Manual 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;VAIO User Guide is a program that opens user manuals 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 on your VAIO computer.&lt;/ENG&gt;&lt;FRA&gt;VAIO Manuel 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     FI-Inazma-PR (Build03) Image BOM Report 
       
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 VCC Descriptions 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Vendor 
                 Component 
                 Release Name 
                 Hover Text 
               
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 D&#39;Utilisateur&lt;/FRA&gt; &lt;ESN&gt;Guia de Usuario de VAIO &lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Sun 
                 Windows 
                 Java 2 Runtime Environment 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;Instails the Sun MicroSystems Java 2 Runtime 
               
               
                 Microsystems 
                   
                   
                 Environment.&lt;/ENG&gt; &lt;FRA&gt;Installe l&#39;environnement 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 d&#39;exécution de Java 2 de Sun MicroSystems.&lt;/FRA&gt; 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 &lt;ESN&gt;Instala el ambiente del tiempo de pasada de Java 2 de los 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Sun MicroSystems.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                 Veritas 
                 Productivity 
                 PxEngine 
                 &lt;ENG&gt;PxEngine is a shared dynamic link library for optical 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 device burning.&lt;/ENG&gt; &lt;FRA&gt;PxEngine est une bibliothèque de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 lien dynamique partagee pour la brulure de circuit 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 optique.&lt;/FRA&gt; &lt;ESN&gt;PxEngine es una biblioteca de 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 acoplamiento dinámica compartida para quemarse del dispositivo 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 óptico.&lt;/ESN&gt; 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     
       
         
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 FI-Inazma-PR (Build03) BOM Details 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Re- 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 cov- 
               
               
                 Vendor 
                 Component 
                 Release Name 
                 Champion 
                 SITID 
                 Version 
                 IRT ID 
                 ery 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Reference 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Reference 
                 Boot Option Setting 
                 Smith 7 
                 0429908.snc 
                 041017 
                 SP-008333-01 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Request 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Reference 
                 HQ Filter setting 
                 Smith 6 
                 0504901.SNC 
                 1.5.02180 
                 SP-009406-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 request 
                   
                   
                 Spirit 2 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Reference 
                 Power Options Setting 
                 Smith 6 
                 0517803.SNC 
                 050627 
                 SP-010128-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Requests 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Reference 
                 Volume Control 
                 Smith 6 
                 0503821.SNC 
                 050201 
                 SP-009178-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Settings 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Reference 
                 FI Spec 
                 Smith 8 
                 0509604.SND 
                 3.0.4 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Reference 
                 HW Build Document 
                 Smith 9 
                 0521508.SND 
                 Inazma-PR 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Build v1.5 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Reference 
                 SCR Specification 
                 Smith 10 
                 0507409.SND 
                 1.1.00.0503150 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Document 
                   
                   
                 English 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Operating System 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 CDCR patch for Media 
                 Smith 5 
                 0320501.mst 
                 1.0.0.0 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Player 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB307154 
                 Smith 5 
                 0428804.MST 
                 English 
                 SP-008374-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LowBatteryAlarm QFE 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB835221 HD Audio 
                 Smith 5 
                 0503804.MST 
                 1.0-200408180 
                 SP-008559-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 QFE 
                   
                   
                 English 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB870669 Critical 
                 Smith 5 
                 0420516.mst 
                 multilingual 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Desktop Update for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MDAC 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB873333 Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0504104.mst 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-009238-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-012 
                   
                   
                 200502090 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB873339-Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0515914.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-009052-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS04-043 
                   
                   
                 200412150 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB883939- 
                 Smith 5 
                 0517207.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-010023.00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cumulative Security 
                   
                   
                 200506200 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update for IE 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB884018-Add and 
                 Smith 5 
                 0422501.MST 
                 English 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Remove programs 
               
               
                   
                   
                 copy error 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB884575 
                 Smith 5 
                 0428801.MST 
                 English 
                 SP-008390.00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BatteryPowerDrain 
               
               
                   
                   
                 QFE 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB885250 Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0504101.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-009229-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-011 
                   
                   
                 200502090 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB885835 Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0503813.MST 
                 KB885835 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS04-044 
                   
                   
                 English 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB885836 Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0503807.mst 
                 KB8885836 
                 SP-009043-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS04-041 
                   
                   
                 English 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB886185 Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0503801.MST 
                 KB886185 
                 SP-009089-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update 
                   
                   
                 English 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB886612 Memory 
                 Smith 5 
                 0427201.mst 
                 english 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Stick Icon Fix 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB886903 Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0513204.mst 
                 KB886903 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-004 
                   
                   
                 Generic 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB887472 Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0504516.mst 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-009312-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-009 
                   
                   
                 200502090 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB887742 
                 Smith 5 
                 0503810.MST 
                 KB887742 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 WLanBlueScreenQFE 
                   
                   
                 English 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB888113 Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0504507.mst 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-009318-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-015 
                   
                   
                 200502090 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB888239 MP10_MS 
                 Smith 5 
                 0434401.MST 
                 English 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 OOBE splash screen 
                   
                   
                 KB888239 
               
               
                   
                   
                 fix 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB888302 Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0504510.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-009330-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-007 
                   
                   
                 200502090 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB890046-Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0517201.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-010076-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-032 
                   
                   
                 200506200 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB890859-Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0515908.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-009693-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05.018 
                   
                   
                 200506030 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB891781 Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0504504.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-009288-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-013 
                   
                   
                 200502090 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB893056 Hibernate 
                 Smith 5 
                 0507506.mst 
                 English 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Button Turn Off fix 
                   
                   
                 KB893056 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB893066-Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0517301.MST 
                 English 2.0- 
                 SP-009713-01 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-019 
                   
                   
                 200506200 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB893086-Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0515901.MST 
                 KB893086 
                 SP-009684-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-016 
                   
                   
                 English 1.0- 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 200506030 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB893803-Windows 
                 Smith 5 
                 0515904.MST 
                 3.1- 
                 SP-009766-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Installer 3.1 
                   
                   
                 KB893803- 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 1.0-200506060 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB894391-SVC Host 
                 Smith 5 
                 0515905.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-009724-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 error fix 
                   
                   
                 200505190 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB896358-Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0517304.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-010013-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update-MS05-026 
                   
                   
                 200506200 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB896422-Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0517204.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP-010055.00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update-MS05-027 
                   
                   
                 200506200 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB896428-Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0522305.MST 
                 English 1.0- 
                 SP.010081-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-033 
                   
                   
                 200506200. 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB901214-Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0521301.mst 
                 English OEM 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-036 
                   
                   
                 distribution 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 KB903235-Security 
                 Smith 5 
                 0521304.mst 
                 English OEM 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Update MS05-037 
                   
                   
                 Distribution 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 Media Player 10 
                 Smith 10 
                 0429401.MST 
                 English OPK 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 Windows.NET 
                 Smith 5 
                 0513101.mst 
                 SPI 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Framework Service 
                   
                   
                 KB867460 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Pack 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 Windows Media 
                 Smith 5 
                 0516001.MST 
                 ver.X10-86962 
                 SP-009834-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Connection 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 Windows XP OPK 
                 Smith 10 
                 0132507.mst 
                 GM 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 MUI 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 Windows XP 
                 Smith 10 
                 0421902.mst 
                 English SP2 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Professional Edition 
                   
                   
                 Gold 
               
               
                 Microsoft 
                 Windows 
                 Windows.NET 
                 Smith 10 
                 0314926.mst 
                 Framework 1.1 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 OPK Support 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Windows 
                 SLP Files 
                 Smith 10 
                 0516012.SNC 
                 1.1.1.0- 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 200506040 
               
               
                 Sun 
                 Windows 
                 Java 2 Runtime 
                 Smith 10 
                 0515401.sun 
                 1.5.0.03 
                   
                 True 
               
               
                 Microsystems 
                   
                 Environment 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Driver 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Alps 
                 Driver-Mouse 
                 Pointing Driver 
                 Smith 6 
                 0519301.ALP 
                 050629 
                 SP-010147-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Registry Patch 
               
               
                 Alps 
                 Driver-Mouse 
                 Touchpad 
                 Smith 6 
                 0421501.alp 
                 5.3.511.2c 
                 SP-001993-36 
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 WHQL 
               
               
                 Connexant 
                 Driver-Modem 
                 Smart MC3Z 
                 Smith 6 
                 0518101.CXT 
                 7.28.00.50- 
                 SP-008161-08 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 050628logo 
               
               
                 Intel 
                 Driver-Network 
                 Ethernet driver 
                 Smith 6 
                 0430001.itl 
                 8.0.13.0 
                 SP-002515-11 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 WHQL 
               
               
                 Intel 
                 Driver-Display 
                 Intel 915G graphics 
                 Smith 6 
                 0518801.itl 
                 6.14.10.4333h 
                 SP-007709-14 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 WHQL 
               
               
                 Intel 
                 Driver-System 
                 Intel 
                 Smith 6 
                 0520902.itl 
                 6.1.0.1008 
                 SP-008174-00 
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                 915GM_PM_GMS_910GML 
                   
                   
                 WHQL 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Alviso 
               
               
                 Intel 
                 Driver-Display 
                 Intel Graphics Driver 
                 Smith 6 
                 0515102.itl 
                 v01 
                 SP-009674.00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Registry Patch 
               
               
                 Intel 
                 Driver-Wireless 
                 Intel Pro 
                 Smith 6 
                 0516401.ITL 
                 9.0.2.25a-logo 
                 SP-007020-07 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                 LAN 
                 2915ABG_2200BG 
               
               
                 RealTek 
                 Driver-Sound 
                 Audio Driver 
                 Smith 6 
                 0519601.RTK 
                 5.10.0.5129- 
                 SP-008252-28 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 050715_WHQL 
               
               
                 Sony Ericsson 
                 Driver-Modem 
                 VDC EGPRS Modem 
                 Smith 11 
                 0506001.ser 
                 3.0.0.1510 
                 SP-009393-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Driver 
                   
                   
                 WHQL 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Driver-System 
                 Notebook Control 
                 Smith 12 
                 0429202.SNC 
                 6.0.1.08290- 
                 SP-004458-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 020604 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 WHQL 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Driver-System 
                 SonyPi 
                 Smith 12 
                 0418902.SNC 
                 7.0.3.820 
                 SP-004457-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 WHQL 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Driver-Mouse 
                 USB Mouse 
                 Smith 6 
                 0508001.SNC 
                 1.56-whql 
                 SP-002012-05 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (resubmitted) 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Driver-Imaging 
                 VAIO USB Camera 
                 Smith 6 
                 0306208.snc 
                 1.2.00.01172 
                 SP-004578-01 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 WHQL 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Driver-Hard Disk 
                 VGP-MCA10 registry 
                 Smith 6 
                 0428705.snc 
                 1.0.0.10130 
                 SP-007787-02 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 patch 
               
               
                 Texas 
                 Driver-Hard Disk 
                 Memory Stick Driver 
                 Smith 6 
                 0520601.tex 
                 2.0.0.5_Logo 
                 SP-009671-04 
                 False 
               
               
                 Instruments 
               
               
                 Texas 
                 Driver-Hard Disk 
                 Memory Stick driver 
                 Smith 6 
                 0517802.tex 
                 1.0.0.0- 
                 SP-010131-00 
                 False 
               
               
                 Instruments 
                   
                 Registry patch 
                   
                   
                 20050610 
               
               
                 Toshiba 
                 Driver-System 
                 Bluetooth driver 
                 Smith 13 
                 0519901.TOB 
                 3.03.13SO- 
                 SP-009675-03 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 04_RC3.20050708 
               
               
                 Toshiba 
                 Driver-System 
                 Bluetooth Registry 
                 Smith 13 
                 0517801.TOB 
                 1.0.0.0 
                 SP-010130-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Patch 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Utility 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 AV Mode Button 
                 Smith 6 
                 0519303.SNC 
                 1.0.00.06291 
                 SP-010142-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Utility 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 Battery Check Utility 
                 Smith 12 
                 0506701.SNC 
                 1.0.02.01240 
                 SP-007112-03 
                 True 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 Memory Stick Pro 
                 Smith 12 
                 0503605.snc 
                 2.4.0.13260.0502040 
                 SP-005054-04 
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Formatter 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 OCA Marker 
                 Smith 6 
                 0404201.snc 
                 1.03.1.0401130 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 SetReso 
                 Smith 12 
                 0429607.snc 
                 2.3.1.2702 
                 SP-002911-18 
                 False 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 Setting Utility Series 
                 Smith 12 
                 0516014.SNC 
                 1.2.00.05270 
                 SP-008403-11 
                 True 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 VAIO Central 
                 Smith 14 
                 0516704.SNC 
                 1.1.02.061005 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 VAIO Event Service 
                 Smith 12 
                 0516805.SNC 
                 2.2.00.06130 
                 SP-008245-21 
                 True 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 VAIO Power 
                 Smith 12 
                 0521405.SNC 
                 1.7.00.08011 
                 SP-008404-19 
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Management 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 System Tool 
                 VAIO Update 
                 Smith 11 
                 0516103.SNC 
                 2.1.02.01250 
                   
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (Not for LA) 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 System Tool 
                 Sony Digital Signature 
                 Smith 15 
                 0121802.snd 
                 1.0 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 System Tool 
                 VAIO Support Central 
                 Smith 14 
                 0519320.SND 
                 1.0.0.63005 
                   
                 False 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Library 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Shared Library 
                 ImageStation Library 
                 Smith 16 
                 0318106.snc 
                 3.0.01.05290 
                 SP-005050-01 
                 True 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Shared Library 
                 Sony MP4 Shared 
                 Smith 17 
                 0503512.snc 
                 1.1.00.12200 
                 SP-009172-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Library 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Shared Library 
                 Sony Shared Library 
                 Smith 18 
                 0503811.snc 
                 2.10.00.01250 
                 SP-005988-01 
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 XP 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Shared Library 
                 Sony Video Shared 
                 Smith 17 
                 0503505.snc 
                 2.0.01.12200 
                 SP-009171-00 
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Library 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Shared Library 
                 SonyUtils 
                 Smith 12 
                 0515908.snc 
                 6.2.00.17310 
                 SP-008151-18 
                 True 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Application-Audio Video 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Macromedia 
                 Multimedia 
                 Flash Player 
                 Smith 19 
                 0420101.MAC 
                 7.0.19.0 
                   
                 True 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Multimedia 
                 OpenMG Setup 
                 Smith 17 
                 0516005.snc 
                 4.2.00.06070 
                 SP-009199-02 
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (Not for LA) 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Multimedia 
                 Sonic Stage Mastering 
                 Smith 17 
                 0430713.snc 
                 1.4.00.10260_Aroma- 
                 SP-007851-03 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Studio Audio Filter 
                   
                   
                 IRX3190 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Presets 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Multimedia 
                 VAIO Entertainment 
                 Smith 17 
                 0517204.snc 
                 1.2.11.06150 
                 SP-009842-01 
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Platform 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Application-Productivity 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Adobe 
                 Productivity 
                 Adobe Reader 
                 Smith 1 
                 0504801.ADB 
                 7.0.0.0-English 
                   
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Updated 
               
               
                 Adobe 
                 Productivity 
                 Adobe Reader Patch 
                 Smith 1 
                 0515201.adb 
                 7.0.1 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                 Veritas 
                 Productivity 
                 PxEngine 
                 Smith 20 
                 0518101.VER 
                 2.4.35.500a 
                 SP-007059-10 
                 True 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Application-Communications 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Google 
                 Communica- 
                 Google Toolbar 
                 Smith 1 
                 0503801.goo 
                 2.0.114.10_US 
                   
                 True 
               
               
                   
                 tion 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Applications-Marketing 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Marketing 
                 Memory Stick Icon 
                 Smith 12 
                 0209504.snc 
                 1.2.0.0- 
                 SP-002377-02 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                 Material 
                   
                   
                   
                 20010912 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Marketing 
                 VAIO LiteFlow 
                 Smith 18 
                 0515905.snc 
                 1.0.01.05100 
                 SP-008504-01 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                 Material 
                 Wallpaper 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Marketing 
                 VAIO Long Battery 
                 Smith 18 
                 0516607.SNC 
                 1.0.00.05200 
                 SP-009801-00 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                 Material 
                 Life Wallpaper 
                   
                   
                 (RC) 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Marketing 
                 VAIO Original Screen 
                 Smith 18 
                 0516001.snc 
                 1.1.01.06070 
                 SP-008470-05 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                 Material 
                 Saver 
               
               
                 Sony ITC 
                 Marketing 
                 VAIO Scene 
                 Smith 18 
                 0503503.snc 
                 1.0.01.- 
                 SP-008486-01 
                 False 
               
               
                   
                 Material 
                 Screensaver 
                   
                   
                 12280_Scene_SD_Wide 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Marketing 
                 Bookmarks-IE 
                 Smith 1 
                 0503801.SND 
                 1.0.00.0502070 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                 Material 
                   
                   
                   
                 (US) 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Marketing 
                 Image Station Photo 
                 Smith 5 
                 0508804.snd 
                 1.0.0.0503280 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                 Material 
                 Printing RegKeys 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Marketing 
                 VAIO Registration 
                 Smith 15 
                 0519419.SND 
                 Fall05-14.0.2 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                   
                 Material 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Documentation 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Documentation 
                 Latest Information 
                 Smith 21 
                 0522304.SND 
                 Fall05 English 
                 n/a 
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 V2 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Documentation 
                 Recovery Guide 
                 Smith 21 
                 0520301.SND 
                 Fall05 English 
                 n/a 
                 True 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Documentation 
                 VAIO User Manual 
                 Smith 21 
                 0520701.SND 
                 1.00.16EN07251 
                 SP-010132.02 
                 True 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 (IRX-3250 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 ENU) 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 SIT Build Tools 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Tools 
                 E-Flyer pop up utility 
                 Smith 4 
                 0507506.SND 
                 1.2.1901.20464 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Tools 
                 HDD Kick Tool 
                 Smith 3 
                 0520614.SND 
                 3.1.5.0 
                   
                 False 
               
               
                 Sony ITD 
                 Tools 
                 VAIO Drivers 
                 Smith 10 
                 0521610.SND 
                 G336B02 
                   
                 True 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Items Associated to Series: 
       
                                     Type   Release Name   Index                  MODULE   MOD-Click_To_DVD   (0518903.snd)       MODULE   MOD-DVGate_Plus   (0516403.snd)       MODULE   MOD-IceMaker   (0519313.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Image_Converter   (0517211.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Moodlogic   (0516810.snd)       MODULE   MOD-MS_Works_Bundle   (0506705.snd)       MODULE   MOD-NIS_2005_Trial   (0521324.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Office_2003_Basic   (0505102.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Office_2003_Professional   (0520615.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Office_2003_Small_Business   (0520613.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Office_2003_Small_Business_Trial   (0519613.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Office_2003_Student_Teacher_Trial   (0519616.snd)       MODULE   MOD-PhotoShop_Album_Starter_Edition   (0517909.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Photoshop_Elements   (0505510.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Premiere_Pro   (0503904.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Premiere_Standard   (0520304.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Quicken_New_User_Edition   (0504901.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Roxio_DigitalMedia_SE   (0518107.snd)       MODULE   MOD-S_S_M_S   (0518801.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Spy_Subtract   (0517402.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Toshiba_Bluetooth   (0518111.snd)       MODULE   MOD-VAIO_Media   (0519301.snd)       MODULE   MOD-VAIO_Survey_Standalone   (0518615.snd)       MODULE   MOD-WinDVD   (0518607.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Wireless_Help_Utility   (0504904.snd)       MODULE   MOD-Wireless_Switch_Setting_Utility   (0518108.snd)       MODULE   XMOD-AOL_Software   (0519417.snd)       MODULE   XMOD-SonicStage   (0517302.snd)       Recovery Image   P1 Recovery Image   (0520914.snd)                    
Changes from Previous:
 
     
       
         
           
               
             
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Missing From Module Build 7 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Vendor 
                 Release Name 
                 Defect Owner 
                 Index 
                 Version 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
               
                 New Components to Premiere Pro Module Build 7 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                 Defect 
                   
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Vendor 
                 Release Name 
                 Owner 
                 Index 
                 Version 
                 IRT ID 
                 Recovery 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
               
                 New Releases to Premiere Pro Module Build 7 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Old 
               
               
                 Vendor 
                 Release Name 
                 Index 
                 New Version 
                 Old SITID 
                 Version 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Removed from Premiere Pro Module Build 7 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Vendor 
                 Release Name 
                 Defect Owner 
                 Index 
                 Version 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Sony 
                 Driver Settings 
                 Smith 6 
                 0503807.SNC 
                 050131 NB 
               
               
                 ITC 
                 Request Page 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     13.6.10 RPT-10: Media Set Report 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Type 
                 Release Name 
                 Index 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Click_To_DVD 
                 (0518903.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-DVGate_Plus 
                 (0516403.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-IceMaker 
                 (0519313.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Image_Converter 
                 (0517211.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Moodlogic 
                 (0516810.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-MS_Works_Bundle 
                 (0506705.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-NIS_2005_Trial 
                 (0521324.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Office_2003_Small_Business_Trial 
                 (0519613.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Office_2003_Student_Teacher_Trial 
                 (0519616.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-PhotoShop_Album_Starter_Edition 
                 (0517909.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Photoshop_Elements 
                 (0505510.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Premiere_Pro 
                 (0503904.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Premiere_Standard 
                 (0520304.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Quicken_New_User_Edition 
                 (0504901.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Roxio_DigitalMedia_SE 
                 (0518107.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-S_S_M_S 
                 (0518801.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Spy_Subtract 
                 (0517402.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Toshiba_Bluetooth 
                 (0518111.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-VAIO_Media 
                 (0519301.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-VAIO_Survey_Standalone 
                 (0518615.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-WinDVD 
                 (0518607.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Wireless_Help_Utility 
                 (0504904.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 MOD-Wireless_Switch_Setting_Utility 
                 (0518108.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 XMOD-AOL_Software 
                 (0519417.snd) 
               
               
                 MODULE 
                 XMOD-SonicStage 
                 (0517302.snd) 
               
               
                 Recovery 
                 P1 Recovery Image 
                 (0520914.snd) 
               
               
                 Image 
               
               
                 Data File 
                 bitindex.ini 
                 (0519625.snd) 
               
               
                 Data File 
                 LeonV-HE Data File 
                 (0521334.snd) 
               
               
                 Data File 
                 module.ini 
                 R (0520102.snd) 
               
               
                 EPC 
                 EPC_A-0198-LeonV_Latest_Information 
                 (0521323.snd) 
               
               
                 EPC 
                 EPC_A-0199-Security_Updates_MS05-036_037 
                 (0521602.snd) 
               
               
                 EPC 
                 EPC_A-0202-Security_Updates_MS05-038_039 
                 (0523011.snd) 
               
               
                 Foundation 
                 FI-LeonV-HE 
                 (0520208.snd) 
               
               
                 Image 
               
               
                 PAC File 
                 FI-LeonV-HE PAC File 
                 (0520209.snd) 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     13.6.11 RPT-11: Part Report 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Part Name 
                 Adobe Premiere Pro 
               
               
                 Parent Planning Part 
                 Adobe Premiere Pro 
               
               
                 Active 
                 Yes 
               
               
                 Major Version 
                 7 
               
               
                 Part Type 
                 Installable Application 
               
               
                 Part Sub Type 
                 Application 
               
               
                 Dependency Append 
                 None 
               
               
                 Dependency 
                 Need: VAIO Edit Components 5.0 
               
               
                 Install Order 
                 After: VAIO Edit Components 5.0 
               
               
                 Customer Label 
                 Adobe Premiere Pro 
               
               
                 Customer Desc 
                 ENU-US: Adobe&#39;s semi professional 
               
               
                   
                 video editing application. 
               
               
                 BLID 
                 N/A 
               
               
                 isDefault 
                 Yes 
               
               
                 Champion 
                 Smith 1 
               
               
                 Owner 
                 Smith 1 
               
               
                 Localised By 
                 VOA 
               
               
                 Target Series 
                 Hogwarts4-MC 
               
               
                   
                 Horizon2-HE 
               
               
                   
                 Horizon2-MC 
               
               
                   
                 Horizon2-PR 
               
               
                   
                 Horizon3_GD-HE 
               
               
                   
                 Horizon3_GD-MC 
               
               
                   
                 Horizon3_GD-PR 
               
               
                   
                 LeonS2-HE 
               
               
                   
                 LeonS2-PR 
               
               
                   
                 LeonV-HE 
               
               
                   
                 LeonV-PR 
               
               
                   
                 Messenger-HE 
               
               
                   
                 Messenger-PR 
               
               
                   
                 Sherry_WWAN-PR 
               
               
                   
                 Spirit2-HE 
               
               
                   
                 Spirit2-PR 
               
               
                   
                 Spirit3-HE 
               
               
                   
                 Spirit3-PR 
               
               
                 Series Dependency 
                 N/A 
               
               
                 Supported LangRegions 
                 ENU-US 
               
               
                 Change Log 
               
               
                 isTemporary 
                 No 
               
               
                 Default Installer Type (select 
                 EXE 
               
               
                 from list) 
               
               
                 Default Setup File 
                 Premiere.EXE 
               
               
                 Default Command Line 
                 -s -n 
               
               
                 Arguments 
               
               
                 Default OPK 
                 No 
               
               
                 Default Base Plus 
                 No 
               
               
                 Default Recoverable 
                 yes 
               
               
                 Default Interactive 
                 No 
               
               
                 Vendor 
                 Adobe 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     13.6.12 RPT-12: Part Release Report 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Attribute Name 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                 Release ID 
                 120123 
               
               
                 Detailed Version 
                 7.5.0.0 
               
               
                 Release Name 
                 Adobe Premiere 7.0 
               
               
                 Target LangRegions 
                 en_US 
               
               
                 Release Notes 
                 ***Install Instructions*** 
               
               
                   
                 [WeberN - 7/16/04 12:10:00 PM] 
               
               
                   
                 Run Setup.exe 
               
               
                   
                 ***Uninstall Instructions*** 
               
               
                   
                 [WeberN - 7/16/04 12:10:00 PM] 
               
               
                   
                 Uninstall via Add/Remove Programs 
               
               
                   
                 ***Release Notes*** 
               
               
                   
                 [WeberN—7/16/04 12:10:00 PM] 
               
               
                   
                 Adobe Premiere Pro 7.5, OEM 282 
               
               
                 Status 
                 GM 
               
               
                 Submitted By 
                 Smith 22 
               
               
                 Next Release 
                 none 
               
               
                 Virus Check 
                 dropdown: statuses TBD 
               
               
                 WHQL status 
                 not applicable 
               
               
                 PlmStatus 
                 dropdown: statuses TBD 
               
               
                 Is Default Release 
                 yes 
               
               
                 Is Latest Release 
                 yes 
               
               
                 Version Path 
                 C:\PROGRAM FILES\ADOBE\ 
               
               
                   
                 PREMIERE PRO 7.5\ADOBE PREMIERE 
               
               
                   
                 PRO.EXE 
               
               
                 Version ID 
                 7.5.0.000.1010 
               
               
                 Version check before 
                 Premiere.EXE version 7.5 
               
               
                 installation 
               
               
                 Change Log 
                 No record 
               
               
                 Installed Folder Path 
                 C:\PROGRAM FILES\ADOBE\ 
               
               
                   
                 PREMIERE PRO 7.5\ 
               
               
                 Installer Place 
                 TBD 
               
               
                 Installer Type (select from 
                 EXE 
               
               
                 list) 
               
               
                 Setup File 
                 Premiere.EXE 
               
               
                 Command Line 
                 -s -n 
               
               
                 Arguments 
               
               
                 OPK 
                 no 
               
               
                 Base Plus 
                 no 
               
               
                 Recoverable 
                 yes 
               
               
                 Interactive 
                 no 
               
               
                 Repackaged 
                 yes 
               
               
                 Snapshot ID 
                 n/a 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     13.6.13 RPT-13: Part Release Version Report 
     13.6.14 RPT44: RTM Report 
     
         
         
           
             1. User picks one Series/LangRegion. 
             2. User picks one or more OSs. 
             3. User selects which sub-reports to include. 
             4. System presents format that can be loaded into MS Word for further editing. 
           
         
       
    
     13.6.15 RPT-15: Test Status for Series 
     13.6.16 RPT46: Test Status for All Active Series 
     13.6.17 RPT47: Defect Report for Individual Defect 
     Now referencing  FIG. 25 , the screen shot of a “Defect View” is shown, which includes the defect report. 
     13.6.18 RPT-18: Defects By User, Team, Series, Cycle, Etc. 
     13.6.19 RPT-19: Test Case Report 
     Now referencing  FIG. 26 , the screen shot of “Test Results: Update from test strategy” is shown. 
     13.6.20 RPT-20: Test Strategy Report 
     With reference to  FIG. 27 , the report currently being implemented is shown. This report must be adapted to the Epic Data Model. 
     13.6.21 RPT-20: Test Strategy Status Report 
     13.6.22 RPT-22: End-of-cycle Defect Report 
     
         
         
           
             1. User picks one or more Series/LangRegion combinations. 
             2. User picks one or more cycles or date ranges. 
             3. User selects which sub-reports to include. 
             4. System loads each report into separate worksheet (preferred) or separate excel document. 
           
         
       
    
     Defect Priority 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Fall 05 
                 Sum 05 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Priority 
                 Priority 0 
                 58 
                 82 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Priority 1 
                 213 
                 99 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Priority 2 
                 263 
                 139 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Priority 3 
                 193 
                 102 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Priority 4 
                 22 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Priority N/A 
                 146 
                 114 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Total 
                 895 
                 540 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Defect Severity 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Fall 05 
                 Sum 05 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Severity 
                 0 
                 20 
                 22 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1 
                 192 
                 120 
               
               
                   
                   
                 2 
                 357 
                 176 
               
               
                   
                   
                 3 
                 203 
                 127 
               
               
                   
                   
                 N/A 
                 123 
                 95 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 895 
                 540 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Defect Exposure 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Fall 05 
                 Sum 05 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                   
                 Exposure 
                 LI 
                 25 
                 17 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HVCG 
                 160 
                 76 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LNFU 
                 348 
                 194 
               
               
                   
                   
                 LIDB 
                 154 
                 96 
               
               
                   
                   
                 VUS 
                 101 
                 59 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Blank 
                 107 
                 98 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 895 
                 540 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Defect Resolution by Application Champion 
     
       
         
           
               
               
            
               
                   
               
               
                 Fall 05 
                 Summer 05 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Champion 
                 Fixed 
                 Def/WNF 
                 Other 
                 Total 
                 Champion 
                 Fixed 
                 Def/WNF 
                 Other 
                 Total 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Smith 23 
                 3 
                 0 
                 3 
                 6 
                 jones1 
                 0 
                 2 
                 2 
                 4 
               
               
                 Smith 24 
                 12 
                 1 
                 5 
                 18 
                 jones2 
                 1 
                 0 
                 0 
                 1 
               
               
                 Smith 18 
                 0 
                 1 
                 2 
                 3 
                 jones3 
                 6 
                 6 
                 16 
                 28 
               
               
                 Smith 25 
                 1 
                 1 
                 2 
                 4 
                 jones4 
                 15 
                 3 
                 8 
                 26 
               
               
                 Smith 26 
                 21 
                 4 
                 18 
                 43 
                 jones5 
                 7 
                 6 
                 4 
                 17 
               
               
                 Smith 27 
                 24 
                 12 
                 6 
                 42 
                 jones 
                 14 
                 3 
                 11 
                 28 
               
               
                 Smith 28 
                 9 
                 1 
                 12 
                 22 
                 jones 
                 8 
                 10 
                 45 
                 63 
               
               
                 Smith 29 
                 1 
                 4 
                 12 
                 17 
                 Jone 
                 0 
                 5 
                 3 
                 8 
               
               
                 Smith 21 
                 8 
                 11 
                 4 
                 23 
                 jones 
                 13 
                 1 
                 3 
                 17 
               
               
                 Smith 30 
                 11 
                 7 
                 7 
                 25 
                 jonesa 
                 1 
                 6 
                 0 
                 7 
               
               
                 Smith 31 
                 16 
                 9 
                 19 
                 44 
                 jones 
                 1 
                 5 
                 5 
                 11 
               
               
                 Smith 32 
                 3 
                 2 
                 19 
                 24 
                 jones 
                 8 
                 2 
                 1 
                 11 
               
               
                 Smith 33 
                 2 
                 1 
                 7 
                 10 
                 Smith 19 
                 1 
                 0 
                 1 
                 2 
               
               
                 Smith 5 
                 19 
                 2 
                 13 
                 34 
                 jones 
                 4 
                 1 
                 1 
                 6 
               
               
                 Smith 19 
                 20 
                 2 
                 1 
                 23 
                 jones 
                 13 
                 3 
                 17 
                 33 
               
               
                 Smith 20 
                 3 
                 2 
                 3 
                 8 
                 jones 
                 26 
                 7 
                 16 
                 49 
               
               
                 Smith 34 
                 6 
                 8 
                 20 
                 34 
                 jones 
                 9 
                 2 
                 2 
                 13 
               
               
                 Smith 35 
                 5 
                 0 
                 3 
                 8 
                 jones 
                 0 
                 2 
                 1 
                 3 
               
               
                 Smith 12 
                 11 
                 4 
                 13 
                 27 
                 jones 
                 71 
                 10 
                 25 
                 106 
               
               
                 Smith 14 
                 4 
                 18 
                 14 
                 36 
                 jones 
                 3 
                 3 
                 6 
                 10 
               
               
                 Smith 10 
                 49 
                 32 
                 58 
                 139 
                 Winter 
                 4 
                 5 
                 2 
                 11 
               
               
                 Smith 36 
                 2 
                 1 
                 2 
                 5 
                 jones 
                 1 
                 40 
                 22 
                 63 
               
               
                 Smith 3 
                 42 
                 23 
                 38 
                 103 
                 jones 
                 7 
                 7 
                 6 
                 20 
               
               
                 Smith 37 
                 27 
                 11 
                 17 
                 53 
               
               
                 Smith 9 
                 4 
                 4 
                 9 
                 17 
               
               
                 Smith 13 
                 13 
                 20 
                 35 
                 68 
               
               
                 Smith 15 
                 9 
                 35 
                 4 
                 48 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Defect Resolution by Module (First Level Applications on FI BOM Should be Included) 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Application 
                 Sev 0 
                 Sev 1 
                 Sev 2 
                 Sev 3 
                 N/A 
                 Total 
                 P = 0 
                 P = 1 
                 P = 2 
                 P = 3 
                 P = 4 
                 P = N/A 
                 Total 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 All resolutions - Fall 2005 - Top Ten 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 HDD Kick Tool 
                 0 
                 29 
                 34 
                 12 
                 14 
                 89 
                 0 
                 34 
                 21 
                 18 
                 2 
                 14 
                 89 
               
               
                 NB Hardware 
                 0 
                 18 
                 26 
                 2 
                 10 
                 56 
                 0 
                 14 
                 19 
                 10 
                 3 
                 10 
                 56 
               
               
                 Other 
               
               
                 VAIO 
                 0 
                 2 
                 7 
                 29 
                 4 
                 42 
                 0 
                 2 
                 6 
                 30 
                 0 
                 4 
                 42 
               
               
                 Registration 
               
               
                 VAIO Support 
                 8 
                 0 
                 11 
                 18 
                 2 
                 39 
                 12 
                 0 
                 6 
                 18 
                 0 
                 3 
                 39 
               
               
                 Central 
               
               
                 Desktop 
                 0 
                 16 
                 10 
                 2 
                 2 
                 30 
                 1 
                 15 
                 10 
                 2 
                 0 
                 2 
                 30 
               
               
                 Hardware Other 
               
               
                 Sony Changer 
                 3 
                 6 
                 14 
                 7 
                 0 
                 30 
                 3 
                 7 
                 14 
                 6 
                 0 
                 0 
                 30 
               
               
                 S/W 
               
               
                 Finger Print PS 
                 0 
                 2 
                 19 
                 5 
                 1 
                 27 
                 0 
                 0 
                 15 
                 9 
                 1 
                 2 
                 27 
               
               
                 IE Remote 
                 0 
                 11 
                 8 
                 6 
                 0 
                 25 
                 0 
                 11 
                 12 
                 2 
                 0 
                 0 
                 25 
               
               
                 Control 
               
               
                 Extension 
               
               
                 Kansas 
                 0 
                 5 
                 10 
                 10 
                 0 
                 25 
                 25 
                 0 
                 0 
                 0 
                 0 
                 0 
                 25 
               
               
                 Emerald/Kansas 
               
               
                 SmartWi 
                 1 
                 2 
                 6 
                 7 
                 8 
                 24 
                 1 
                 2 
                 9 
                 4 
                 0 
                 8 
                 24 
               
               
                 Connection 
               
               
                 Utility 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 All resolutions - Summer 2005 - Top Ten 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 HDD Kick Tool 
                 0 
                 46 
                 45 
                 14 
                 6 
                 111 
                 23 
                 32 
                 39 
                 9 
                 0 
                 8 
                 111 
               
               
                 VAIO Control 
                 0 
                 2 
                 18 
                 13 
                 10 
                 43 
                 1 
                 7 
                 11 
                 11 
                 1 
                 12 
                 43 
               
               
                 Central 
               
               
                 VAIO Central 
                 12 
                 0 
                 9 
                 5 
                 6 
                 32 
                 24 
                 0 
                 0 
                 1 
                 0 
                 7 
                 32 
               
               
                 Beta 
               
               
                 Connection 
                 1 
                 0 
                 2 
                 21 
                 4 
                 28 
                 0 
                 0 
                 12 
                 9 
                 1 
                 6 
                 28 
               
               
                 Manager 
               
               
                 SmartWi 
                 0 
                 0 
                 1 
                 16 
                 9 
                 26 
                 0 
                 1 
                 3 
                 12 
                 0 
                 10 
                 26 
               
               
                 Connection 
               
               
                 Utility 
               
               
                 Emerald Beta 
                 1 
                 7 
                 5 
                 3 
                 3 
                 19 
                 14 
                 0 
                 0 
                 2 
                 0 
                 3 
                 19 
               
               
                 VAIO 
                 0 
                 0 
                 5 
                 5 
                 4 
                 14 
                 0 
                 1 
                 1 
                 8 
                 0 
                 4 
                 14 
               
               
                 Registration 
               
               
                 Intel Graphics 
                 0 
                 2 
                 3 
                 3 
                 5 
                 13 
                 0 
                 2 
                 4 
                 2 
                 0 
                 5 
                 13 
               
               
                 Windows Media 
                 0 
                 2 
                 4 
                 2 
                 3 
                 11 
                 0 
                 2 
                 2 
                 4 
                 0 
                 3 
                 11 
               
               
                 Center 
               
               
                 AOL 
                 0 
                 5 
                 1 
                 1 
                 2 
                 9 
                 0 
                 3 
                 2 
                 2 
                 0 
                 2 
                 9 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     Ton Ten Deferred/Will Not Fix Defects 
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Application 
                 Sev 0 
                 Sev 1 
                 Sev 2 
                 Sev 3 
                 N/A 
                 Total 
               
               
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Top Ten Deferred/Will Not Fix Fall 2005 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 VAIO Registration 
                 0 
                 0 
                 4 
                 27 
                 0 
                 31 
               
               
                 HDD Kick Tool 
                 0 
                 1 
                 10 
                 9 
                 0 
                 20 
               
               
                 VAIO Support Central 
                 0 
                 0 
                 5 
                 13 
                 0 
                 18 
               
               
                 Windows MCE 
                 0 
                 0 
                 4 
                 8 
                 0 
                 12 
               
               
                  Notebook Hardware Other 
                 0 
                 1 
                 8 
                 2 
                 0 
                 11 
               
               
                 Sony Changer S/W 
                 0 
                 1 
                 4 
                 4 
                 0 
                 9 
               
               
                 Fingerprint Protection Suite 
                 0 
                 0 
                 3 
                 3 
                 0 
                 6 
               
               
                 Intel 915G Graphics 
                 0 
                 0 
                 4 
                 2 
                 0 
                 6 
               
               
                 MOD-Wireless Connection 
                 0 
                 0 
                 1 
                 5 
                 0 
                 6 
               
               
                 Utility 
               
               
                 Libertas 802.11bg Wireless 
                 0 
                 1 
                 0 
                 4 
                 0 
                 5 
               
            
           
           
               
            
               
                 Top Ten Deferred/Will Not Fix Summer 2005 
               
            
           
           
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
               
                 Connection Manager 
                 0 
                 0 
                 2 
                 18 
                 0 
                 20 
               
               
                 SmartWi Connection Utility 
                 0 
                 0 
                 0 
                 15 
                 0 
                 15 
               
               
                 HDD Kick Tool 
                 0 
                 3 
                 6 
                 1 
                 0 
                 10 
               
               
                 Emerald Beta 
                 1 
                 0 
                 1 
                 2 
                 2 
                 6 
               
               
                 VAIO Registration 
                 0 
                 0 
                 2 
                 4 
                 0 
                 6 
               
               
                 Intel Graphics 
                 0 
                 0 
                 2 
                 3 
                 0 
                 5 
               
               
                 VAIO Control Center 
                 0 
                 0 
                 2 
                 3 
                 0 
                 5 
               
               
                 Windows MCE 
                 0 
                 0 
                 3 
                 2 
                 0 
                 5 
               
               
                 AOL 
                 0 
                 2 
                 1 
                 1 
                 0 
                 4 
               
               
                 VAIO Central Beta 
                 1 
                 0 
                 2 
                 0 
                 0 
                 3 
               
               
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     13.6.23 RPT-23: Build Count 
       
     
       
         
           
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 FI 
                 Recovery 
               
               
                   
                 Project 
                 OS 
                 Builds 
                 Media Builds 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
            
               
                   
                 Horizon2 
                 MCE 
                 4 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                 Horizon2 
                 HE 
                 2 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Mare4/Viento4 
                 HE 
                 4 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 Spirit2 
                 HE 
                 3 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 Spirit2 
                 PR 
                 3 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 JediH2 
                 HE 
                 2 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                 LeonS2 
                 HE 
                 2 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 LeonS2 
                 PR 
                 2 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Horizon2 
                 LA 
                 2 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HE 
               
               
                   
                 Viento 
                 LA 
                 2 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HE 
               
               
                   
                 Horizon2 
                 PR 
                 2 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                 Spirit2 
                 LA 
                 4 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HE 
               
               
                   
                 Spirit2 
                 LA 
                 4 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 PR 
               
               
                   
                 LeonS2 
                 LA 
                 2 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HE 
               
               
                   
                 LeonS2 
                 LA 
                 2 
                 3 
               
               
                   
                   
                 PR 
               
               
                   
                 Spirit2 
                 FC 
                 2 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HE 
               
               
                   
                 Aroma3 
                 HE 
                 4 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 Aroma3 
                 PR 
                 3 
                 5 
               
               
                   
                 Aroma3 
                 LA 
                 2 
                 2 
               
               
                   
                   
                 PR 
               
               
                   
                 Hogwarts4 
                 MCE 
                 4 
                 4 
               
               
                   
                 Hogwarts4 
                 LA 
                 2 
                 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HE 
               
               
                   
                   
               
            
           
         
       
     
     While the particular SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SOFTWARE INTEGRATION AND FACTORY DEPLOYMENT is herein shown and described in detail, it is to be understood that the subject matter which is encompassed by the present invention is limited only by the claims.